Add a new ".nop" directive to the assembler to allow the creation of no-op instructio...
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BPF
44 @set BPF
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-<N>}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--gdwarf-cie-version}=@var{VERSION}]
235 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
236 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
238 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
239 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
240 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--generate-missing-build-notes=[no|yes]}]
248 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
249 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
250 @c
251 @c man end
252 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
253 @c Add an empty line for separation.
254 @c man begin TARGET
255 @ifset AARCH64
256
257 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
258 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
259 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
260 @end ifset
261 @ifset ALPHA
262
263 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
264 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
265 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
266 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
267 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
268 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
269 @end ifset
270 @ifset ARC
271
272 @emph{Target ARC options:}
273 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
274 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
275 [@b{-mcode-density}]
276 [@b{-mrelax}]
277 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
278 @end ifset
279 @ifset ARM
280
281 @emph{Target ARM options:}
282 @c Don't document the deprecated options
283 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
285 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
286 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
287 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
288 [@b{-mthumb}]
289 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
290 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
291 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
292 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
293 @end ifset
294 @ifset Blackfin
295
296 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
297 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
298 [@b{-mfdpic}]
299 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
300 [@b{-mnopic}]
301 @end ifset
302 @ifset BPF
303
304 @emph{Target BPF options:}
305 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}]
306 @end ifset
307 @ifset CRIS
308
309 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
310 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
311 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
312 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
313 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
314 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
315 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
316 @end ifset
317 @ifset CSKY
318
319 @emph{Target C-SKY options:}
320 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
321 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-mlittle-endian}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-mbig-endian}]
322 [@b{-fpic}] [@b{-pic}]
323 [@b{-mljump}] [@b{-mno-ljump}]
324 [@b{-force2bsr}] [@b{-mforce2bsr}] [@b{-no-force2bsr}] [@b{-mno-force2bsr}]
325 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-mjsri2bsr}] [@b{-no-jsri2bsr }] [@b{-mno-jsri2bsr}]
326 [@b{-mnolrw }] [@b{-mno-lrw}]
327 [@b{-melrw}] [@b{-mno-elrw}]
328 [@b{-mlaf }] [@b{-mliterals-after-func}]
329 [@b{-mno-laf}] [@b{-mno-literals-after-func}]
330 [@b{-mlabr}] [@b{-mliterals-after-br}]
331 [@b{-mno-labr}] [@b{-mnoliterals-after-br}]
332 [@b{-mistack}] [@b{-mno-istack}]
333 [@b{-mhard-float}] [@b{-mmp}] [@b{-mcp}] [@b{-mcache}]
334 [@b{-msecurity}] [@b{-mtrust}]
335 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-medsp}] [@b{-mvdsp}]
336 @end ifset
337 @ifset D10V
338
339 @emph{Target D10V options:}
340 [@b{-O}]
341 @end ifset
342 @ifset D30V
343
344 @emph{Target D30V options:}
345 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
346 @end ifset
347 @ifset EPIPHANY
348
349 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
350 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
351 @end ifset
352 @ifset H8
353
354 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
355 [-h-tick-hex]
356 @end ifset
357 @ifset HPPA
358 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
359 @end ifset
360 @ifset I80386
361
362 @emph{Target i386 options:}
363 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
364 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
365 @end ifset
366 @ifset IA64
367
368 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
369 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
370 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
371 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
372 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
373 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
374 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
375 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
376 @end ifset
377 @ifset IP2K
378
379 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
380 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
381 @end ifset
382 @ifset M32C
383
384 @emph{Target M32C options:}
385 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
386 @end ifset
387 @ifset M32R
388
389 @emph{Target M32R options:}
390 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
391 @b{--W[n]p}]
392 @end ifset
393 @ifset M680X0
394
395 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
396 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
397 @end ifset
398 @ifset M68HC11
399
400 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
401 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
402 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
403 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
404 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
405 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
406 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
407 @end ifset
408 @ifset MCORE
409
410 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
411 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
412 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
413 @end ifset
414 @ifset METAG
415
416 @emph{Target Meta options:}
417 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
418 @end ifset
419 @ifset MICROBLAZE
420 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
421 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
422 @end ifset
423 @ifset MIPS
424
425 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
426 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
427 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
428 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
429 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
430 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
431 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
432 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
433 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
434 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
435 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
436 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
437 [@b{-mignore-branch-isa}] [@b{-mno-ignore-branch-isa}]
438 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
439 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
440 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
441 [@b{-mmips16e2}] [@b{-mno-mips16e2}]
442 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
443 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
444 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
445 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
446 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
447 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
448 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
449 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
450 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
451 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
452 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
453 [@b{-mcrc}] [@b{-mno-crc}]
454 [@b{-mginv}] [@b{-mno-ginv}]
455 [@b{-mloongson-mmi}] [@b{-mno-loongson-mmi}]
456 [@b{-mloongson-cam}] [@b{-mno-loongson-cam}]
457 [@b{-mloongson-ext}] [@b{-mno-loongson-ext}]
458 [@b{-mloongson-ext2}] [@b{-mno-loongson-ext2}]
459 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
460 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
461 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
462 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
463 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
464 [@b{-mfix-r5900}] [@b{-mno-fix-r5900}]
465 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
466 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset MMIX
469
470 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
471 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
472 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
473 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
474 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
475 @end ifset
476 @ifset NIOSII
477
478 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
479 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
480 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
481 @end ifset
482 @ifset NDS32
483
484 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
485 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
486 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
487 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
488 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
489 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
490 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
491 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
492 [@b{-mb2bb}]
493 @end ifset
494 @ifset OPENRISC
495 @c OpenRISC has no machine-dependent assembler options.
496 @end ifset
497 @ifset PDP11
498
499 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
500 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
501 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
502 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
503 @end ifset
504 @ifset PJ
505
506 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
507 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
508 @end ifset
509 @ifset PPC
510
511 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
512 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
513 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
514 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mgekko}|
515 @b{-mbroadway}|@b{-mppc64}|@b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|
516 @b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|@b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|
517 @b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|@b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
518 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mspe2}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
519 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
520 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
521 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
522 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
523 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
524 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
525 @end ifset
526 @ifset PRU
527
528 @emph{Target PRU options:}
529 [@b{-link-relax}]
530 [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
531 [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
532 @end ifset
533 @ifset RISCV
534
535 @emph{Target RISC-V options:}
536 [@b{-fpic}|@b{-fPIC}|@b{-fno-pic}]
537 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
538 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
539 @end ifset
540 @ifset RL78
541
542 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
543 [@b{-mg10}]
544 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
545 @end ifset
546 @ifset RX
547
548 @emph{Target RX options:}
549 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
550 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
551 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
552 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
553 [@b{-mpid}]
554 [@b{-mrelax}]
555 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
556 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
557 @end ifset
558 @ifset S390
559
560 @emph{Target s390 options:}
561 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
562 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
563 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
564 @end ifset
565 @ifset SCORE
566
567 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
568 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
569 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
570 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
571 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
572 @end ifset
573 @ifset SPARC
574
575 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
576 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
577 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
578 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
579 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
580 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
581 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
582 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
583 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
584 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
585 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
586 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
587 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
588 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
589 @b{-bump}]
590 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
591 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
592 @end ifset
593 @ifset TIC54X
594
595 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
596 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
597 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
598 @end ifset
599 @ifset TIC6X
600
601 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
602 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
603 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
604 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
605 @end ifset
606 @ifset TILEGX
607
608 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
609 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
610 @end ifset
611 @ifset TILEPRO
612 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
613 @end ifset
614 @ifset VISIUM
615
616 @emph{Target Visium options:}
617 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
618 @end ifset
619 @ifset XTENSA
620
621 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
622 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
623 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
624 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
625 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
626 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
627 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
628 [@b{--abi-windowed}|@b{--abi-call0}]
629 @end ifset
630 @ifset Z80
631
632 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
633 [@b{-march=@var{CPU}@var{[-EXT]}@var{[+EXT]}}]
634 [@b{-local-prefix=}@var{PREFIX}]
635 [@b{-colonless}]
636 [@b{-sdcc}]
637 [@b{-fp-s=}@var{FORMAT}]
638 [@b{-fp-d=}@var{FORMAT}]
639 @end ifset
640 @ifset Z8000
641
642 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
643 @end ifset
644
645 @c man end
646 @end smallexample
647
648 @c man begin OPTIONS
649
650 @table @gcctabopt
651 @include at-file.texi
652
653 @item -a[cdghlmns]
654 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
655
656 @table @gcctabopt
657 @item -ac
658 omit false conditionals
659
660 @item -ad
661 omit debugging directives
662
663 @item -ag
664 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
665
666 @item -ah
667 include high-level source
668
669 @item -al
670 include assembly
671
672 @item -am
673 include macro expansions
674
675 @item -an
676 omit forms processing
677
678 @item -as
679 include symbols
680
681 @item =file
682 set the name of the listing file
683 @end table
684
685 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
686 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
687 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
688
689 @item --alternate
690 Begin in alternate macro mode.
691 @ifclear man
692 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
693 @end ifclear
694
695 @item --compress-debug-sections
696 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
697 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
698 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
699 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
700
701 @ifset ELF
702 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
703 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
704 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
705 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
706 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
707 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
708 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
709 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
710 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
711 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
712 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
713 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
714 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
715 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
716 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
717
718 @end ifset
719
720 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
721 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
722 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
723 override this.
724
725 @item -D
726 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
727 other assemblers.
728
729 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
730 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
731 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
732
733 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
734 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
735 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
736 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
737 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
738 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
739
740 @item -f
741 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
742 compiler output).
743
744 @item -g
745 @itemx --gen-debug
746 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
747 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
748 ECOFF or DWARF2. When the debug format is DWARF then a @code{.debug_info} and
749 @code{.debug_line} section is only emitted when the assembly file doesn't
750 generate one itself.
751
752 @item --gstabs
753 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
754 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
755
756 @item --gstabs+
757 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
758 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
759 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
760 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
761 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
762
763 @item --gdwarf-2
764 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
765 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
766 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
767
768 @item --gdwarf-3
769 This option is the same as the @option{--gdwarf-2} option, except that it
770 allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per
771 version 3 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not
772 guarantee the generation of any extra information, the choice to do so is on a
773 per target basis.
774
775 @item --gdwarf-4
776 This option is the same as the @option{--gdwarf-2} option, except that it
777 allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per
778 version 4 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not
779 guarantee the generation of any extra information, the choice to do so is on a
780 per target basis.
781
782 @item --gdwarf-5
783 This option is the same as the @option{--gdwarf-2} option, except that it
784 allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per
785 version 5 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not
786 guarantee the generation of any extra information, the choice to do so is on a
787 per target basis.
788
789 @item --gdwarf-sections
790 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
791 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
792 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
793 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
794 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
795 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
796 suffix.
797
798 @item --gdwarf-cie-version=@var{version}
799 Control which version of DWARF Common Information Entries (CIEs) are produced.
800 When this flag is not specificed the default is version 1, though some targets
801 can modify this default. Other possible values for @var{version} are 3 or 4.
802
803 @ifset ELF
804 @item --size-check=error
805 @itemx --size-check=warning
806 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
807
808 @item --elf-stt-common=no
809 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
810 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
811 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
812 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
813
814 @item --generate-missing-build-notes=yes
815 @itemx --generate-missing-build-notes=no
816 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate GNU Build
817 attribute notes if none are present in the input sources.
818 The default can be controlled by the @option{--enable-generate-build-notes}
819 configure option.
820
821 @end ifset
822
823 @item --help
824 Print a summary of the command-line options and exit.
825
826 @item --target-help
827 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
828
829 @item -I @var{dir}
830 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
831
832 @item -J
833 Don't warn about signed overflow.
834
835 @item -K
836 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
837 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
838 @end ifclear
839 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
840 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
841 @end ifset
842
843 @item -L
844 @itemx --keep-locals
845 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
846 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
847 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
848 @ifclear man
849 @xref{Symbol Names}.
850 @end ifclear
851
852 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
853 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
854 listing to @var{number}.
855
856 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
857 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
858 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
859
860 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
861 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
862 @var{number} bytes.
863
864 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
865 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
866 to @var{number} + 1.
867
868 @item --no-pad-sections
869 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
870 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
871 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
872
873 @item -o @var{objfile}
874 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
875
876 @item -R
877 Fold the data section into the text section.
878
879 @ifset ELF
880 @item --sectname-subst
881 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
882 @ifclear man
883 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
884 @end ifclear
885 @end ifset
886
887 @item --statistics
888 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
889 assembly.
890
891 @item --strip-local-absolute
892 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
893
894 @item -v
895 @itemx -version
896 Print the @command{as} version.
897
898 @item --version
899 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
900
901 @item -W
902 @itemx --no-warn
903 Suppress warning messages.
904
905 @item --fatal-warnings
906 Treat warnings as errors.
907
908 @item --warn
909 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
910
911 @item -w
912 Ignored.
913
914 @item -x
915 Ignored.
916
917 @item -Z
918 Generate an object file even after errors.
919
920 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
921 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
922
923 @end table
924 @c man end
925
926 @ifset AARCH64
927
928 @ifclear man
929 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
930 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
931 @end ifclear
932
933 @ifset man
934 @c man begin OPTIONS
935 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
936 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
937 @c man end
938 @c man begin INCLUDE
939 @include c-aarch64.texi
940 @c ended inside the included file
941 @end ifset
942
943 @end ifset
944
945 @ifset ALPHA
946
947 @ifclear man
948 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
949 for an Alpha processor.
950 @end ifclear
951
952 @ifset man
953 @c man begin OPTIONS
954 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
955 processor.
956 @c man end
957 @c man begin INCLUDE
958 @include c-alpha.texi
959 @c ended inside the included file
960 @end ifset
961
962 @end ifset
963
964 @c man begin OPTIONS
965 @ifset ARC
966 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
967 processor.
968
969 @table @gcctabopt
970 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
971 This option selects the core processor variant.
972 @item -EB | -EL
973 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
974 @item -mcode-density
975 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
976 @end table
977 @end ifset
978
979 @ifset ARM
980 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
981 processor family.
982
983 @table @gcctabopt
984 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
985 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
986 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
987 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
988 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
989 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
990 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
991 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
992 @item -mthumb
993 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
994 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
995 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
996 @item -EB | -EL
997 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
998 @item -mthumb-interwork
999 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
1000 ARM code in mind.
1001 @item -mccs
1002 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
1003 @item -k
1004 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
1005 @end table
1006 @end ifset
1007 @c man end
1008
1009 @ifset Blackfin
1010
1011 @ifclear man
1012 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1013 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
1014 @end ifclear
1015
1016 @ifset man
1017 @c man begin OPTIONS
1018 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1019 the Blackfin processor family.
1020 @c man end
1021 @c man begin INCLUDE
1022 @include c-bfin.texi
1023 @c ended inside the included file
1024 @end ifset
1025
1026 @end ifset
1027
1028 @ifset BPF
1029
1030 @ifclear man
1031 @xref{BPF Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1032 configured for the Linux kernel BPF processor family.
1033 @end ifclear
1034
1035 @ifset man
1036 @c man begin OPTIONS
1037 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1038 the Linux kernel BPF processor family.
1039 @c man end
1040 @c man begin INCLUDE
1041 @include c-bpf.texi
1042 @c ended inside the included file
1043 @end ifset
1044
1045 @end ifset
1046
1047 @c man begin OPTIONS
1048 @ifset CRIS
1049 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
1050 @end ifset
1051
1052 @ifset CSKY
1053
1054 @ifclear man
1055 @xref{C-SKY Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1056 configured for the C-SKY processor family.
1057 @end ifclear
1058
1059 @ifset man
1060 @c man begin OPTIONS
1061 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1062 the C-SKY processor family.
1063 @c man end
1064 @c man begin INCLUDE
1065 @include c-csky.texi
1066 @c ended inside the included file
1067 @end ifset
1068
1069 @end ifset
1070
1071 @ifset D10V
1072 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1073 a D10V processor.
1074 @table @gcctabopt
1075 @cindex D10V optimization
1076 @cindex optimization, D10V
1077 @item -O
1078 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
1079 @end table
1080 @end ifset
1081
1082 @ifset D30V
1083 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
1084 processor.
1085 @table @gcctabopt
1086 @cindex D30V optimization
1087 @cindex optimization, D30V
1088 @item -O
1089 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
1090
1091 @cindex D30V nops
1092 @item -n
1093 Warn when nops are generated.
1094
1095 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
1096 @item -N
1097 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
1098 @end table
1099 @end ifset
1100 @c man end
1101
1102 @ifset EPIPHANY
1103 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1104 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1105
1106 @ifclear man
1107 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1108 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1109 @end ifclear
1110
1111 @ifset man
1112 @c man begin OPTIONS
1113 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1114 an Epiphany processor.
1115 @c man end
1116 @c man begin INCLUDE
1117 @include c-epiphany.texi
1118 @c ended inside the included file
1119 @end ifset
1120
1121 @end ifset
1122
1123 @ifset H8300
1124
1125 @ifclear man
1126 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1127 for an H8/300 processor.
1128 @end ifclear
1129
1130 @ifset man
1131 @c man begin OPTIONS
1132 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1133 processor.
1134 @c man end
1135 @c man begin INCLUDE
1136 @include c-h8300.texi
1137 @c ended inside the included file
1138 @end ifset
1139
1140 @end ifset
1141
1142 @ifset I80386
1143
1144 @ifclear man
1145 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1146 configured for an i386 processor.
1147 @end ifclear
1148
1149 @ifset man
1150 @c man begin OPTIONS
1151 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1152 an i386 processor.
1153 @c man end
1154 @c man begin INCLUDE
1155 @include c-i386.texi
1156 @c ended inside the included file
1157 @end ifset
1158
1159 @end ifset
1160
1161 @c man begin OPTIONS
1162 @ifset IP2K
1163 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1164 Ubicom IP2K series.
1165
1166 @table @gcctabopt
1167
1168 @item -mip2022ext
1169 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1170
1171 @item -mip2022
1172 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1173 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1174
1175 @end table
1176 @end ifset
1177
1178 @ifset M32C
1179 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1180 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1181
1182 @table @gcctabopt
1183
1184 @item -m32c
1185 Assemble M32C instructions.
1186
1187 @item -m16c
1188 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1189
1190 @item -relax
1191 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1192
1193 @item -h-tick-hex
1194 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1195
1196 @end table
1197 @end ifset
1198
1199 @ifset M32R
1200 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1201 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1202
1203 @table @gcctabopt
1204
1205 @item --m32rx
1206 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1207 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1208
1209 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1210 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1211 encountered.
1212
1213 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1214 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1215 encountered.
1216
1217 @end table
1218 @end ifset
1219
1220 @ifset M680X0
1221 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1222 Motorola 68000 series.
1223
1224 @table @gcctabopt
1225
1226 @item -l
1227 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1228
1229 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1230 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1231 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1232 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1233 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1234
1235 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1236 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1237 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1238 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1239 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1240 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1241
1242 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1243 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1244 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1245
1246 @end table
1247 @end ifset
1248
1249 @ifset NIOSII
1250
1251 @ifclear man
1252 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1253 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1254 @end ifclear
1255
1256 @ifset man
1257 @c man begin OPTIONS
1258 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1259 Altera Nios II processor.
1260 @c man end
1261 @c man begin INCLUDE
1262 @include c-nios2.texi
1263 @c ended inside the included file
1264 @end ifset
1265 @end ifset
1266
1267 @ifset PDP11
1268
1269 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1270 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1271
1272 @table @gcctabopt
1273 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1274 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1275 default is @option{-mpic}.
1276
1277 @item -mall
1278 @itemx -mall-extensions
1279 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1280
1281 @item -mno-extensions
1282 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1283
1284 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1285 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1286
1287 @item -m@var{cpu}
1288 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1289 disable all other extensions.
1290
1291 @item -m@var{machine}
1292 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1293 model, and disable all other extensions.
1294 @end table
1295
1296 @end ifset
1297
1298 @ifset PJ
1299 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1300 a picoJava processor.
1301
1302 @table @gcctabopt
1303
1304 @cindex PJ endianness
1305 @cindex endianness, PJ
1306 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1307 @item -mb
1308 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1309
1310 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1311 @item -ml
1312 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1313
1314 @end table
1315 @end ifset
1316
1317 @ifset PRU
1318
1319 @ifclear man
1320 @xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1321 for a PRU processor.
1322 @end ifclear
1323
1324 @ifset man
1325 @c man begin OPTIONS
1326 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1327 PRU processor.
1328 @c man end
1329 @c man begin INCLUDE
1330 @include c-pru.texi
1331 @c ended inside the included file
1332 @end ifset
1333 @end ifset
1334
1335 @ifset M68HC11
1336 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1337 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1338
1339 @table @gcctabopt
1340
1341 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1342 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1343 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1344
1345 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1346 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1347 XGATE address space.
1348
1349 @item -mshort
1350 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1351
1352 @item -mlong
1353 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1354
1355 @item -mshort-double
1356 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1357
1358 @item -mlong-double
1359 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1360
1361 @item --force-long-branches
1362 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1363 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1364 sub routine.
1365
1366 @item -S | --short-branches
1367 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1368 when the offset is out of range.
1369
1370 @item --strict-direct-mode
1371 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1372 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1373
1374 @item --print-insn-syntax
1375 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1376
1377 @item --print-opcodes
1378 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1379
1380 @item --generate-example
1381 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1382 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1383
1384 @end table
1385 @end ifset
1386
1387 @ifset SPARC
1388 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1389 for the SPARC architecture:
1390
1391 @table @gcctabopt
1392 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1393 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1394 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1395
1396 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1397 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1398
1399 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1400 UltraSPARC extensions.
1401
1402 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1403 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1404 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1405
1406 @item -bump
1407 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1408 @end table
1409 @end ifset
1410
1411 @ifset TIC54X
1412 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1413 architecture.
1414
1415 @table @gcctabopt
1416 @item -mfar-mode
1417 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1418 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1419 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1420 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1421 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1422 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1423 behaviour in the shell.
1424 @end table
1425 @end ifset
1426
1427 @ifset MIPS
1428 @c man begin OPTIONS
1429 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1430 a MIPS processor.
1431
1432 @table @gcctabopt
1433 @item -G @var{num}
1434 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1435 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1436 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1437
1438 @cindex MIPS endianness
1439 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1440 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1441 @item -EB
1442 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1443
1444 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1445 @item -EL
1446 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1447
1448 @cindex MIPS ISA
1449 @item -mips1
1450 @itemx -mips2
1451 @itemx -mips3
1452 @itemx -mips4
1453 @itemx -mips5
1454 @itemx -mips32
1455 @itemx -mips32r2
1456 @itemx -mips32r3
1457 @itemx -mips32r5
1458 @itemx -mips32r6
1459 @itemx -mips64
1460 @itemx -mips64r2
1461 @itemx -mips64r3
1462 @itemx -mips64r5
1463 @itemx -mips64r6
1464 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1465 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1466 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1467 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1468 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1469 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1470 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1471 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1472 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1473 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1474
1475 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1476 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1477
1478 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1479 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1480
1481 @item -mfix7000
1482 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1483 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1484 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1485
1486 @item -mfix-rm7000
1487 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1488 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1489 followed by a load instruction.
1490
1491 @item -mfix-r5900
1492 @itemx -mno-fix-r5900
1493 Do not attempt to schedule the preceding instruction into the delay slot
1494 of a branch instruction placed at the end of a short loop of six
1495 instructions or fewer and always schedule a @code{nop} instruction there
1496 instead. The short loop bug under certain conditions causes loops to
1497 execute only once or twice, due to a hardware bug in the R5900 chip.
1498
1499 @item -mdebug
1500 @itemx -no-mdebug
1501 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1502 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1503
1504 @item -mpdr
1505 @itemx -mno-pdr
1506 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1507
1508 @item -mgp32
1509 @itemx -mfp32
1510 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1511 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1512 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1513 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1514
1515 @item -mgp64
1516 @itemx -mfp64
1517 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1518 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1519 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1520 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1521
1522 @item -mfpxx
1523 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1524 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1525 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1526 32 or 64 bits wide.
1527
1528 @item -modd-spreg
1529 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1530 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1531 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1532 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1533
1534 @item -mips16
1535 @itemx -no-mips16
1536 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1537 @code{.module mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1538 turns off this option.
1539
1540 @item -mmips16e2
1541 @itemx -mno-mips16e2
1542 Enable the use of MIPS16e2 instructions in MIPS16 mode. This is equivalent
1543 to putting @code{.module mips16e2} at the start of the assembly file.
1544 @samp{-mno-mips16e2} turns off this option.
1545
1546 @item -mmicromips
1547 @itemx -mno-micromips
1548 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1549 @code{.module micromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1550 @samp{-mno-micromips} turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting
1551 @code{.module nomicromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1552
1553 @item -msmartmips
1554 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1555 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1556 equivalent to putting @code{.module smartmips} at the start of the assembly
1557 file. @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1558
1559 @item -mips3d
1560 @itemx -no-mips3d
1561 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1562 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1563 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1564
1565 @item -mdmx
1566 @itemx -no-mdmx
1567 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1568 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1569 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1570
1571 @item -mdsp
1572 @itemx -mno-dsp
1573 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1574 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1575 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1576
1577 @item -mdspr2
1578 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1579 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1580 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1581 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1582 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1583
1584 @item -mdspr3
1585 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1586 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1587 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1588 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1589 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1590
1591 @item -mmsa
1592 @itemx -mno-msa
1593 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1594 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1595 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1596
1597 @item -mxpa
1598 @itemx -mno-xpa
1599 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1600 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1601 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1602
1603 @item -mmt
1604 @itemx -mno-mt
1605 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1606 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1607 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1608
1609 @item -mmcu
1610 @itemx -mno-mcu
1611 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1612 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1613 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1614
1615 @item -mcrc
1616 @itemx -mno-crc
1617 Generate code for the MIPS cyclic redundancy check (CRC) Application
1618 Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept CRC instructions.
1619 @samp{-mno-crc} turns off this option.
1620
1621 @item -mginv
1622 @itemx -mno-ginv
1623 Generate code for the Global INValidate (GINV) Application Specific
1624 Extension. This tells the assembler to accept GINV instructions.
1625 @samp{-mno-ginv} turns off this option.
1626
1627 @item -mloongson-mmi
1628 @itemx -mno-loongson-mmi
1629 Generate code for the Loongson MultiMedia extensions Instructions (MMI)
1630 Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MMI
1631 instructions.
1632 @samp{-mno-loongson-mmi} turns off this option.
1633
1634 @item -mloongson-cam
1635 @itemx -mno-loongson-cam
1636 Generate code for the Loongson Content Address Memory (CAM) instructions.
1637 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson CAM instructions.
1638 @samp{-mno-loongson-cam} turns off this option.
1639
1640 @item -mloongson-ext
1641 @itemx -mno-loongson-ext
1642 Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions (EXT) instructions.
1643 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson EXT instructions.
1644 @samp{-mno-loongson-ext} turns off this option.
1645
1646 @item -mloongson-ext2
1647 @itemx -mno-loongson-ext2
1648 Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions R2 (EXT2) instructions.
1649 This option implies @samp{-mloongson-ext}.
1650 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson EXT2 instructions.
1651 @samp{-mno-loongson-ext2} turns off this option.
1652
1653 @item -minsn32
1654 @itemx -mno-insn32
1655 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1656 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1657 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1658 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1659 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1660 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1661 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1662
1663 @item --construct-floats
1664 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1665 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1666 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1667 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1668 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1669 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1670
1671 @item --relax-branch
1672 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1673 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1674 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1675 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1676
1677 @item -mignore-branch-isa
1678 @itemx -mno-ignore-branch-isa
1679 Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes. The
1680 semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in
1681 most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the
1682 same as the ISA mode of the branch's target label. Therefore GAS has
1683 checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA
1684 modes match. @samp{-mignore-branch-isa} disables these checks. By
1685 default @samp{-mno-ignore-branch-isa} is selected, causing any invalid
1686 branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
1687
1688 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1689 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1690 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1691
1692 @cindex emulation
1693 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1694 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1695 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1696 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1697 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1698
1699 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1700 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1701 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1702 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1703 preferred options instead.
1704
1705 @item -nocpp
1706 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1707 the native tools.
1708
1709 @item --trap
1710 @itemx --no-trap
1711 @itemx --break
1712 @itemx --no-break
1713 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1714 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1715 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1716 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1717 break exception.
1718
1719 @item -n
1720 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1721 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1722 @end table
1723 @c man end
1724 @end ifset
1725
1726 @ifset MCORE
1727 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1728 an MCore processor.
1729
1730 @table @gcctabopt
1731 @item -jsri2bsr
1732 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1733 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1734 The command-line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1735
1736 @item -sifilter
1737 @itemx -nosifilter
1738 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1739 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command-line option.
1740
1741 @item -relax
1742 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1743
1744 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1745 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1746 can be assembled.
1747
1748 @item -EB
1749 Assemble for a big endian target.
1750
1751 @item -EL
1752 Assemble for a little endian target.
1753
1754 @end table
1755 @end ifset
1756 @c man end
1757
1758 @ifset METAG
1759
1760 @ifclear man
1761 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1762 for a Meta processor.
1763 @end ifclear
1764
1765 @ifset man
1766 @c man begin OPTIONS
1767 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1768 Meta processor.
1769 @c man end
1770 @c man begin INCLUDE
1771 @include c-metag.texi
1772 @c ended inside the included file
1773 @end ifset
1774
1775 @end ifset
1776
1777 @c man begin OPTIONS
1778 @ifset MMIX
1779 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1780 @end ifset
1781
1782 @ifset NDS32
1783
1784 @ifclear man
1785 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1786 for a NDS32 processor.
1787 @end ifclear
1788 @c ended inside the included file
1789 @end ifset
1790
1791 @ifset man
1792 @c man begin OPTIONS
1793 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1794 NDS32 processor.
1795 @c man end
1796 @c man begin INCLUDE
1797 @include c-nds32.texi
1798 @c ended inside the included file
1799 @end ifset
1800
1801 @c man end
1802 @ifset PPC
1803
1804 @ifclear man
1805 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1806 for a PowerPC processor.
1807 @end ifclear
1808
1809 @ifset man
1810 @c man begin OPTIONS
1811 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1812 PowerPC processor.
1813 @c man end
1814 @c man begin INCLUDE
1815 @include c-ppc.texi
1816 @c ended inside the included file
1817 @end ifset
1818
1819 @end ifset
1820
1821 @ifset RISCV
1822
1823 @ifclear man
1824 @xref{RISC-V-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1825 for a RISC-V processor.
1826 @end ifclear
1827
1828 @ifset man
1829 @c man begin OPTIONS
1830 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1831 RISC-V processor.
1832 @c man end
1833 @c man begin INCLUDE
1834 @include c-riscv.texi
1835 @c ended inside the included file
1836 @end ifset
1837
1838 @end ifset
1839
1840 @c man begin OPTIONS
1841 @ifset RX
1842 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1843 @end ifset
1844
1845 @ifset S390
1846 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1847 processor family.
1848
1849 @table @gcctabopt
1850 @item -m31
1851 @itemx -m64
1852 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1853 @item -mesa
1854 @item -mzarch
1855 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1856 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1857 @item -march=@var{processor}
1858 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1859 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1860 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1861 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1862 @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}), @samp{z14} (or @samp{arch12}), or @samp{z15}
1863 (or @samp{arch13}).
1864 @item -mregnames
1865 @itemx -mno-regnames
1866 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1867 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1868 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1869 but evaluates to zero.
1870 @end table
1871 @end ifset
1872 @c man end
1873
1874 @ifset TIC6X
1875
1876 @ifclear man
1877 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1878 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1879 @end ifclear
1880
1881 @ifset man
1882 @c man begin OPTIONS
1883 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1884 TMS320C6000 processor.
1885 @c man end
1886 @c man begin INCLUDE
1887 @include c-tic6x.texi
1888 @c ended inside the included file
1889 @end ifset
1890
1891 @end ifset
1892
1893 @ifset TILEGX
1894
1895 @ifclear man
1896 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1897 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1898 @end ifclear
1899
1900 @ifset man
1901 @c man begin OPTIONS
1902 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1903 processor.
1904 @c man end
1905 @c man begin INCLUDE
1906 @include c-tilegx.texi
1907 @c ended inside the included file
1908 @end ifset
1909
1910 @end ifset
1911
1912 @ifset VISIUM
1913
1914 @ifclear man
1915 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1916 for a Visium processor.
1917 @end ifclear
1918
1919 @ifset man
1920 @c man begin OPTIONS
1921 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1922 processor.
1923 @c man end
1924 @c man begin INCLUDE
1925 @include c-visium.texi
1926 @c ended inside the included file
1927 @end ifset
1928
1929 @end ifset
1930
1931 @ifset XTENSA
1932
1933 @ifclear man
1934 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1935 for an Xtensa processor.
1936 @end ifclear
1937
1938 @ifset man
1939 @c man begin OPTIONS
1940 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1941 Xtensa processor.
1942 @c man end
1943 @c man begin INCLUDE
1944 @include c-xtensa.texi
1945 @c ended inside the included file
1946 @end ifset
1947
1948 @end ifset
1949
1950 @ifset Z80
1951
1952 @ifclear man
1953 @xref{Z80 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1954 for an Z80 processor.
1955 @end ifclear
1956
1957 @ifset man
1958 @c man begin OPTIONS
1959 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1960 Z80 processor.
1961 @c man end
1962 @c man begin INCLUDE
1963 @include c-z80.texi
1964 @c ended inside the included file
1965 @end ifset
1966
1967 @end ifset
1968
1969 @menu
1970 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1971 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1972 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1973 * Command Line:: Command Line
1974 * Input Files:: Input Files
1975 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1976 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1977 @end menu
1978
1979 @node Manual
1980 @section Structure of this Manual
1981
1982 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1983 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1984 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1985 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1986 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1987
1988 @ifclear GENERIC
1989 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1990 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1991 @end ifclear
1992 @ifset GENERIC
1993 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1994 various flavors of the assembler.
1995 @end ifset
1996
1997 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1998 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1999 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
2000 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
2001 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
2002 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
2003 particular architecture.
2004 @ifset GENERIC
2005 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
2006 machine architecture manual for this information.
2007 @end ifset
2008 @ifclear GENERIC
2009 @ifset H8/300
2010 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
2011 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
2012 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
2013 @end ifset
2014 @ifset SH
2015 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
2016 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
2017 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
2018 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
2019 @end ifset
2020 @ifset Z8000
2021 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
2022 @end ifset
2023 @end ifclear
2024
2025 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
2026 @ignore
2027 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
2028 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
2029 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
2030 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
2031 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
2032 qualification.
2033
2034 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
2035 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
2036 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
2037 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
2038 @end ignore
2039
2040 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
2041 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
2042 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
2043 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
2044 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
2045 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
2046 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
2047 @c directives).
2048
2049 @node GNU Assembler
2050 @section The GNU Assembler
2051
2052 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2053
2054 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
2055 @ifclear GENERIC
2056 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
2057 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
2058 @end ifclear
2059 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
2060 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
2061 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
2062 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
2063 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
2064
2065 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
2066 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
2067 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
2068 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
2069 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
2070 machine would assemble.
2071 @ifset VAX
2072 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
2073 @end ifset
2074 @ifset M680X0
2075 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
2076 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
2077 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
2078 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
2079 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
2080 @end ifset
2081
2082 @c man end
2083
2084 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
2085 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
2086 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
2087
2088 @node Object Formats
2089 @section Object File Formats
2090
2091 @cindex object file format
2092 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
2093 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
2094 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
2095 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
2096 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
2097 @ifclear GENERIC
2098 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
2099 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
2100 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
2101 @end ifclear
2102 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
2103 @ifset HPPA
2104 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
2105 SOM or ELF format object files.
2106 @end ifset
2107 @end ifclear
2108
2109 @node Command Line
2110 @section Command Line
2111
2112 @cindex command line conventions
2113
2114 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
2115 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
2116 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
2117 significant.
2118
2119 @cindex standard input, as input file
2120 @kindex --
2121 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
2122 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
2123
2124 @cindex options, command line
2125 Except for @samp{--} any command-line argument that begins with a
2126 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
2127 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
2128 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
2129 the letter is important. All options are optional.
2130
2131 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
2132 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
2133 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
2134 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
2135
2136 @smallexample
2137 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2138 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2139 @end smallexample
2140
2141 @node Input Files
2142 @section Input Files
2143
2144 @cindex input
2145 @cindex source program
2146 @cindex files, input
2147 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2148 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2149 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2150 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2151
2152 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2153 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2154 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2155 order specified.
2156
2157 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2158 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2159 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2160 (The standard input is also a file.)
2161
2162 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2163 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2164 command-line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2165 is taken to be an input file name.
2166
2167 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2168 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2169 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2170 to assemble.
2171
2172 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2173 in your command line.
2174
2175 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2176 file.
2177
2178 @c man end
2179
2180 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2181
2182 @cindex input file linenumbers
2183 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2184 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2185 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2186 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2187 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2188
2189 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2190 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2191
2192 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2193 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2194 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2195 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2196 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2197 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2198
2199 @node Object
2200 @section Output (Object) File
2201
2202 @cindex object file
2203 @cindex output file
2204 @kindex a.out
2205 @kindex .o
2206 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2207 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2208 is the object file. Its default name is @code{a.out}.
2209 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2210 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2211 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2212 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2213 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2214
2215 @cindex linker
2216 @kindex ld
2217 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2218 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2219 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2220 information for the debugger.
2221
2222 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2223 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2224
2225 @node Errors
2226 @section Error and Warning Messages
2227
2228 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2229
2230 @cindex error messages
2231 @cindex warning messages
2232 @cindex messages from assembler
2233 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2234 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2235 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2236 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2237 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2238
2239 @c man end
2240
2241 @cindex format of warning messages
2242 Warning messages have the format
2243
2244 @smallexample
2245 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2246 @end smallexample
2247
2248 @noindent
2249 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2250 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2251 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2252 @ifset GENERIC
2253 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2254 @end ifset
2255 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2256 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2257 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2258
2259 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2260 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2261
2262 @smallexample
2263 .file 2 "bar.c"
2264 error_assembler_source
2265 .file "foo.c"
2266 .line 30
2267 error_c_source
2268 @end smallexample
2269
2270 produces this output:
2271
2272 @smallexample
2273 Assembler messages:
2274 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2275 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2276 @end smallexample
2277
2278 @cindex format of error messages
2279 Error messages have the format
2280
2281 @smallexample
2282 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2283 @end smallexample
2284
2285 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2286 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2287 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2288
2289 @node Invoking
2290 @chapter Command-Line Options
2291
2292 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2293 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2294 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2295 for options specific
2296 @ifclear GENERIC
2297 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2298 @end ifclear
2299 @ifset GENERIC
2300 to particular machine architectures.
2301 @end ifset
2302
2303 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2304
2305 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2306 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2307 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2308 by commas. For example:
2309
2310 @smallexample
2311 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2312 @end smallexample
2313
2314 @noindent
2315 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2316 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2317 local symbols in the symbol table).
2318
2319 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2320 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2321 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2322 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2323 assembler.)
2324
2325 @c man end
2326
2327 @menu
2328 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2329 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2330 * D:: -D for compatibility
2331 * f:: -f to work faster
2332 * I:: -I for .include search path
2333 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2334 * K:: -K for compatibility
2335 @end ifclear
2336 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2337 * K:: -K for difference tables
2338 @end ifset
2339
2340 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2341 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2342 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2343 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2344 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2345 * o:: -o to name the object file
2346 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2347 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2348 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2349 * v:: -v to announce version
2350 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2351 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2352 @end menu
2353
2354 @node a
2355 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2356
2357 @kindex -a
2358 @kindex -ac
2359 @kindex -ad
2360 @kindex -ag
2361 @kindex -ah
2362 @kindex -al
2363 @kindex -an
2364 @kindex -as
2365 @cindex listings, enabling
2366 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2367
2368 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2369 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2370 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2371 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2372 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2373 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2374 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2375 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2376 also.
2377
2378 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2379 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2380
2381 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2382 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2383 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2384 omitted from the listing.
2385
2386 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2387 listing.
2388
2389 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2390 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2391 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2392 @code{.sbttl}.
2393 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2394 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2395 listing-control directives have no effect.
2396
2397 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2398 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2399
2400 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2401 because it
2402 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command-line switch
2403 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2404 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2405 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2406 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2407
2408 @node alternate
2409 @section @option{--alternate}
2410
2411 @kindex --alternate
2412 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2413
2414 @node D
2415 @section @option{-D}
2416
2417 @kindex -D
2418 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2419 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2420 @command{@value{AS}}.
2421
2422 @node f
2423 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2424
2425 @kindex -f
2426 @cindex trusted compiler
2427 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2428 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2429 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2430 and comment preprocessing on
2431 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2432 ,Preprocessing}.
2433
2434 @quotation
2435 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2436 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2437 not work correctly.
2438 @end quotation
2439
2440 @node I
2441 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2442
2443 @kindex -I @var{path}
2444 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2445 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2446 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2447 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2448 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2449 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2450 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2451 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2452 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2453 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2454
2455 @node K
2456 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2457
2458 @kindex -K
2459 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2460 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2461 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2462 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2463 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2464 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2465 alteration on other platforms.
2466 @end ifclear
2467
2468 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2469 @cindex difference tables, warning
2470 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2471 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2472 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2473 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2474 is done.
2475 @end ifset
2476
2477 @node L
2478 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2479
2480 @kindex -L
2481 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2482 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2483 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2484 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2485 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2486 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2487 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2488 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2489
2490 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2491 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2492 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2493
2494 @node listing
2495 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2496
2497 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command-line switch
2498 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2499 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2500 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2501 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2502 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2503 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2504 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2505
2506 @table @gcctabopt
2507 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2508 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2509 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2510 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2511 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2512
2513 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2514 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2515 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2516 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2517 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2518 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2519 switch is used the default is to one.
2520
2521 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2522 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2523 @cindex Width of source line output
2524 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2525 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2526 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2527
2528 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2529 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2530 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2531 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2532 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2533 @end table
2534
2535 @node M
2536 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2537
2538 @kindex -M
2539 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2540 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2541 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2542 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} assembler from Microtec Research.
2543 The exact nature of the
2544 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2545 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2546 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2547 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2548
2549 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2550 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2551 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2552 individually. These are:
2553
2554 @itemize @bullet
2555 @item global symbols in common section
2556
2557 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2558 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2559 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2560 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2561 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2562
2563 @item complex relocations
2564
2565 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2566 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2567 are not support by other object file formats.
2568
2569 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2570
2571 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2572 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2573 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2574 script.
2575
2576 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2577
2578 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2579 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2580
2581 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2582
2583 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2584 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2585 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2586 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2587 assigned within a linker script.
2588 @end itemize
2589
2590 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2591 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2592 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2593
2594 @itemize @bullet
2595
2596 @item EBCDIC strings
2597
2598 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2599
2600 @item packed binary coded decimal
2601
2602 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2603 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2604
2605 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2606
2607 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2608
2609 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2610
2611 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2612
2613 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2614
2615 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2616 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2617 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2618 these options serve no purpose.
2619
2620 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2621
2622 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2623 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2624 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2625
2626 @item other @code{OPT} options
2627
2628 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2629 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2630
2631 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2632
2633 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2634 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2635
2636 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2637
2638 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2639
2640 @end itemize
2641
2642 @node MD
2643 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2644
2645 @kindex --MD
2646 @cindex dependency tracking
2647 @cindex make rules
2648
2649 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2650 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2651 dependencies of the main source file.
2652
2653 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2654
2655 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2656
2657 @node no-pad-sections
2658 @section Output Section Padding
2659 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2660 @cindex output section padding
2661 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2662 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2663 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2664 disable this behaviour.
2665
2666 @node o
2667 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2668
2669 @kindex -o
2670 @cindex naming object file
2671 @cindex object file name
2672 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2673 default it has the name @file{a.out}.
2674 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2675 object file a different name.
2676
2677 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2678 existing file of the same name.
2679
2680 @node R
2681 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2682
2683 @kindex -R
2684 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2685 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2686 @cindex joining text and data sections
2687 @cindex merging text and data sections
2688 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2689 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2690 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2691 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2692 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2693 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2694
2695 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2696 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2697 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2698 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2699
2700 @ifset COFF-ELF
2701 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2702 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2703 @samp{.data}.
2704 @end ifset
2705
2706 @ifset HPPA
2707 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2708 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2709 @end ifset
2710
2711 @node statistics
2712 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2713
2714 @kindex --statistics
2715 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2716 @cindex time, total for assembly
2717 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2718 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2719 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2720 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2721 seconds).
2722
2723 @node traditional-format
2724 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2725
2726 @kindex --traditional-format
2727 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2728 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2729 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2730
2731 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2732 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2733
2734 @node v
2735 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2736
2737 @kindex -v
2738 @kindex -version
2739 @cindex assembler version
2740 @cindex version of assembler
2741 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2742 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2743 command line.
2744
2745 @node W
2746 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2747
2748 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2749 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2750 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2751 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2752
2753 @kindex -W
2754 @kindex --no-warn
2755 @cindex suppressing warnings
2756 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2757 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2758 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2759 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2760 are still reported.
2761
2762 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2763 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2764 @cindex warnings, causing error
2765 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2766 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2767
2768 @kindex --warn
2769 @cindex warnings, switching on
2770 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2771 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2772
2773 @node Z
2774 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2775 @cindex object file, after errors
2776 @cindex errors, continuing after
2777 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2778 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2779 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2780 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2781 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2782 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2783
2784 @node Syntax
2785 @chapter Syntax
2786
2787 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2788 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2789 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2790 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2791 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2792 @ifclear VAX
2793 assembler.
2794 @end ifclear
2795 @ifset VAX
2796 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2797 @end ifset
2798
2799 @menu
2800 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2801 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2802 * Comments:: Comments
2803 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2804 * Statements:: Statements
2805 * Constants:: Constants
2806 @end menu
2807
2808 @node Preprocessing
2809 @section Preprocessing
2810
2811 @cindex preprocessing
2812 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2813 @itemize @bullet
2814 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2815 @item
2816 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2817 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2818 a single space.
2819
2820 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2821 @item
2822 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2823 appropriate number of newlines.
2824
2825 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2826 @item
2827 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2828 @end itemize
2829
2830 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2831 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2832 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2833 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2834 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2835 @samp{.S} suffix. @url{https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Overall-Options.html#Overall-Options,
2836 See the 'Options Controlling the Kind of Output' section of the GCC manual for
2837 more details}
2838
2839 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2840 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2841 preprocessed.
2842
2843 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2844 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2845 @kindex #NO_APP
2846 @kindex #APP
2847 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2848 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2849 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2850 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2851 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2852 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2853 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2854 and whitespace.
2855
2856 @node Whitespace
2857 @section Whitespace
2858
2859 @cindex whitespace
2860 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2861 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2862 people to read. Unless within character constants
2863 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2864 as exactly one space.
2865
2866 @node Comments
2867 @section Comments
2868
2869 @cindex comments
2870 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2871 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2872
2873 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2874 This means you may not nest these comments.
2875
2876 @smallexample
2877 /*
2878 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2879 is to use this sort of comment.
2880 */
2881
2882 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2883 @end smallexample
2884
2885 @cindex line comment character
2886 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2887 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2888 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2889 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2890 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2891 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2892 upon command-line options that have been used. For more details see the
2893 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2894
2895 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2896 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2897 to specify logical line numbers:
2898
2899 @kindex #
2900 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2901 @cindex logical line numbers
2902 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2903 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2904 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2905 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2906 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2907
2908 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2909 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2910
2911 @smallexample
2912 # This is an ordinary comment.
2913 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2914 # This is logical line # 36.
2915 @end smallexample
2916 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2917 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2918
2919 @node Symbol Intro
2920 @section Symbols
2921
2922 @cindex characters used in symbols
2923 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2924 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2925 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2926 @samp{_.$}.
2927 @end ifclear
2928 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2929 @ifclear GENERIC
2930 @ifset H8
2931 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2932 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2933 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2934 symbol names.)
2935 @end ifset
2936 @end ifclear
2937 @end ifset
2938 @ifset GENERIC
2939 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2940 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2941 @end ifset
2942 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2943 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2944 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2945 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2946 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2947
2948 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2949 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2950 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceded by a
2951 backslash @code{\} character.
2952 @cindex length of symbols
2953
2954 @node Statements
2955 @section Statements
2956
2957 @cindex statements, structure of
2958 @cindex line separator character
2959 @cindex statement separator character
2960
2961 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2962 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2963 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2964 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2965 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2966 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2967 exception: they do not end statements.
2968
2969 @cindex newline, required at file end
2970 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2971 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2972 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2973
2974 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2975
2976 @cindex instructions and directives
2977 @cindex directives and instructions
2978 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2979 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2980 @c 13feb91.
2981 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2982 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2983 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2984 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2985 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2986 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2987 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2988 @ifset GENERIC
2989 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2990 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2991 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2992 language.@refill
2993 @end ifset
2994
2995 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2996 @cindex label (@code{:})
2997 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2998 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2999 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
3000
3001 @ifset HPPA
3002 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
3003 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
3004 only one label may be defined on each line.
3005 @end ifset
3006
3007 @smallexample
3008 label: .directive followed by something
3009 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
3010 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
3011 @end smallexample
3012
3013 @node Constants
3014 @section Constants
3015
3016 @cindex constants
3017 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
3018 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
3019 @smallexample
3020 @group
3021 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
3022 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
3023 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
3024 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
3025 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
3026 @end group
3027 @end smallexample
3028
3029 @menu
3030 * Characters:: Character Constants
3031 * Numbers:: Number Constants
3032 @end menu
3033
3034 @node Characters
3035 @subsection Character Constants
3036
3037 @cindex character constants
3038 @cindex constants, character
3039 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
3040 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
3041 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
3042 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
3043 used in arithmetic expressions.
3044
3045 @menu
3046 * Strings:: Strings
3047 * Chars:: Characters
3048 @end menu
3049
3050 @node Strings
3051 @subsubsection Strings
3052
3053 @cindex string constants
3054 @cindex constants, string
3055 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
3056 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
3057 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
3058 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
3059 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
3060 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
3061 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
3062 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
3063
3064 @cindex escape codes, character
3065 @cindex character escape codes
3066 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
3067 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
3068 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
3069 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
3070 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
3071 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
3072 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
3073 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
3074 @table @kbd
3075 @c @item \a
3076 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
3077 @c
3078 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
3079 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
3080 @item \b
3081 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
3082
3083 @c @item \e
3084 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
3085 @c
3086 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
3087 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
3088 @item backslash-f
3089 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
3090
3091 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
3092 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
3093 @item \n
3094 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
3095
3096 @c @item \p
3097 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
3098 @c
3099 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
3100 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
3101 @item \r
3102 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
3103
3104 @c @item \s
3105 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
3106 @c other assemblers.
3107 @c
3108 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3109 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
3110 @item \t
3111 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3112
3113 @c @item \v
3114 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3115 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3116 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3117 @c
3118 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3119 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3120 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3121 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3122 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3123 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3124
3125 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3126 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3127 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3128 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3129 lower case @code{x} works.
3130
3131 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3132 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3133 @item \\
3134 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3135
3136 @c @item \'
3137 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3138 @c This is needed in single character literals
3139 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3140 @c a @samp{'}.
3141 @c
3142 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3143 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3144 @item \"
3145 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3146 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3147
3148 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3149 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3150 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3151 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3152 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3153 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3154 code and warns you of the fact.
3155 @end table
3156
3157 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3158 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3159 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3160 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3161 sequence.
3162
3163 @node Chars
3164 @subsubsection Characters
3165
3166 @cindex single character constant
3167 @cindex character, single
3168 @cindex constant, single character
3169 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3170 that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3171 @code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3172 as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3173 character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3174 the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3175 accent. A newline
3176 @ifclear GENERIC
3177 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3178 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3179 @end ifclear
3180 @ifset abnormal-separator
3181 @ifset H8
3182 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3183 Renesas SH)
3184 @end ifset
3185 @end ifset
3186 @end ifclear
3187 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3188 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3189 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3190 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3191 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3192
3193 @node Numbers
3194 @subsection Number Constants
3195
3196 @cindex constants, number
3197 @cindex number constants
3198 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3199 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3200 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3201 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3202 are floating point numbers, described below.
3203
3204 @menu
3205 * Integers:: Integers
3206 * Bignums:: Bignums
3207 * Flonums:: Flonums
3208 @ifclear GENERIC
3209 @end ifclear
3210 @end menu
3211
3212 @node Integers
3213 @subsubsection Integers
3214 @cindex integers
3215 @cindex constants, integer
3216
3217 @cindex binary integers
3218 @cindex integers, binary
3219 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3220 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3221
3222 @cindex octal integers
3223 @cindex integers, octal
3224 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3225 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3226
3227 @cindex decimal integers
3228 @cindex integers, decimal
3229 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3230 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3231
3232 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3233 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3234 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3235 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3236
3237 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3238 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3239 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3240
3241 @node Bignums
3242 @subsubsection Bignums
3243
3244 @cindex bignums
3245 @cindex constants, bignum
3246 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3247 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3248 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3249 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3250
3251 @node Flonums
3252 @subsubsection Flonums
3253 @cindex flonums
3254 @cindex floating point numbers
3255 @cindex constants, floating point
3256
3257 @cindex precision, floating point
3258 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3259 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3260 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3261 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3262 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3263 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3264
3265 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3266 @itemize @bullet
3267 @item
3268 The digit @samp{0}.
3269 @ifset HPPA
3270 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3271 @end ifset
3272
3273 @item
3274 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3275 @ifset GENERIC
3276 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3277 @ignore
3278 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3279 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3280 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3281 @end ignore
3282
3283 On the H8/300 and Renesas / SuperH SH architectures, the letter must be
3284 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3285
3286 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3287 (in upper or lower case).
3288
3289 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3290 @end ifset
3291 @ifclear GENERIC
3292 @ifset ARC
3293 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3294 @end ifset
3295 @ifset H8
3296 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3297 @end ifset
3298 @ifset HPPA
3299 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3300 @end ifset
3301 @end ifclear
3302
3303 @item
3304 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3305
3306 @item
3307 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3308
3309 @item
3310 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3311 or more decimal digits.
3312
3313 @item
3314 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3315
3316 @itemize @bullet
3317 @item
3318 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3319 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3320 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3321 @item
3322 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3323 @item
3324 One or more decimal digits.
3325 @end itemize
3326
3327 @end itemize
3328
3329 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3330 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3331
3332 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3333 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3334 @command{@value{AS}}.
3335
3336 @node Sections
3337 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3338 @cindex sections
3339 @cindex relocation
3340
3341 @menu
3342 * Secs Background:: Background
3343 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3344 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3345 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3346 * bss:: bss Section
3347 @end menu
3348
3349 @node Secs Background
3350 @section Background
3351
3352 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3353 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3354 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3355
3356 @cindex linker, and assembler
3357 @cindex assembler, and linker
3358 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3359 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3360 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3361 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3362 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3363 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3364 sections.
3365
3366 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3367 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3368 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3369 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3370 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3371 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3372 the proper run-time addresses.
3373 @ifset H8
3374 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3375 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3376 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3377 @end ifset
3378
3379 @cindex standard assembler sections
3380 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3381 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3382 @dfn{bss} sections.
3383
3384 @ifset COFF-ELF
3385 @ifset GENERIC
3386 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3387 @end ifset
3388 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3389 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3390 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3391 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3392 @end ifset
3393
3394 @ifset HPPA
3395 @ifset GENERIC
3396 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3397 @end ifset
3398 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3399 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3400 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3401 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3402 assembler directives.
3403
3404 @ifset SOM
3405 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3406 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3407 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3408 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3409 @end ifset
3410 @end ifset
3411
3412 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3413 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3414
3415 @ifset HPPA
3416 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3417 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3418 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3419 @end ifset
3420
3421 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3422 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3423 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3424 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3425 file is mentioned:
3426 @itemize @bullet
3427 @item
3428 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3429 an address?
3430 @item
3431 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3432 @item
3433 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3434 @display
3435 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3436 @end display
3437 @item
3438 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3439 @end itemize
3440
3441 @cindex addresses, format of
3442 @cindex section-relative addressing
3443 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3444 @display
3445 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3446 @end display
3447 @noindent
3448 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3449 nature.
3450 @ifset SOM
3451 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3452 symbol-relative instead.)
3453 @end ifset
3454
3455 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3456 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3457
3458 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3459 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3460 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3461 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3462 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3463 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3464 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3465 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3466 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3467
3468 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3469 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3470 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3471 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3472 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3473 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3474 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3475
3476 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3477 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3478 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3479 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3480 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3481 data and bss sections.
3482
3483 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3484 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3485
3486 @node Ld Sections
3487 @section Linker Sections
3488 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3489
3490 @table @strong
3491
3492 @ifset COFF-ELF
3493 @cindex named sections
3494 @cindex sections, named
3495 @item named sections
3496 @end ifset
3497 @ifset aout
3498 @cindex text section
3499 @cindex data section
3500 @itemx text section
3501 @itemx data section
3502 @end ifset
3503 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3504 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3505 true of another.
3506 @c @ifset aout
3507 When the program is running, however, it is
3508 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3509 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3510 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3511 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3512 in the data section.
3513 @c @end ifset
3514
3515 @cindex bss section
3516 @item bss section
3517 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3518 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3519 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3520 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3521 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3522 those explicit zeros from object files.
3523
3524 @cindex absolute section
3525 @item absolute section
3526 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3527 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3528 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3529 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3530
3531 @cindex undefined section
3532 @item undefined section
3533 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3534 the preceding sections.
3535 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3536 @end table
3537
3538 @cindex relocation example
3539 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3540 @ifset COFF-ELF
3541 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3542 @end ifset
3543 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3544
3545 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3546 @ifnottex
3547 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3548 @smallexample
3549 +-----+----+--+
3550 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3551 +-----+----+--+
3552
3553 text data bss
3554 seg. seg. seg.
3555
3556 +---+---+---+
3557 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3558 +---+---+---+
3559
3560 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3561 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3562 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3563
3564 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3565 @end smallexample
3566 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3567 @end ifnottex
3568 @need 5000
3569 @tex
3570 \bigskip
3571 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3572 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3573 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3574
3575 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3576 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3577 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3578
3579 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3580 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3581 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3582 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3583 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3584
3585 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3586 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3587
3588 @end tex
3589 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3590
3591 @node As Sections
3592 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3593
3594 @cindex internal assembler sections
3595 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3596 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3597 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3598 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3599 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3600 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3601 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3602 section-relative address.
3603
3604 @table @b
3605 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3606 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3607 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3608 bug in the assembler.
3609
3610 @cindex expr (internal section)
3611 @item expr section
3612 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3613 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3614 it in the expr section.
3615 @c FIXME item debug
3616 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3617 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3618 @c FIXME item register
3619 @end table
3620
3621 @node Sub-Sections
3622 @section Sub-Sections
3623
3624 @cindex numbered subsections
3625 @cindex grouping data
3626 @ifset aout
3627 Assembled bytes
3628 @ifset COFF-ELF
3629 conventionally
3630 @end ifset
3631 fall into two sections: text and data.
3632 @end ifset
3633 You may have separate groups of
3634 @ifset GENERIC
3635 data in named sections
3636 @end ifset
3637 @ifclear GENERIC
3638 @ifclear aout
3639 data in named sections
3640 @end ifclear
3641 @ifset aout
3642 text or data
3643 @end ifset
3644 @end ifclear
3645 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3646 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3647 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3648 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3649 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3650 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3651 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3652 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3653 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3654 constants being output.
3655
3656 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3657 goes in subsection number zero.
3658
3659 @ifset GENERIC
3660 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3661 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3662 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3663 @end ifset
3664 @ifclear GENERIC
3665 @ifset H8
3666 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3667 boundary (two bytes).
3668 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3669 @end ifset
3670 @end ifclear
3671
3672 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3673 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3674 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3675 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3676 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3677 data subsections as a data section.
3678
3679 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3680 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3681 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3682 @ifset COFF
3683 @ifset GENERIC
3684 When generating COFF output, you
3685 @end ifset
3686 @ifclear GENERIC
3687 You
3688 @end ifclear
3689 can also use an extra subsection
3690 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3691 @var{expression}}.
3692 @end ifset
3693 @ifset ELF
3694 @ifset GENERIC
3695 When generating ELF output, you
3696 @end ifset
3697 @ifclear GENERIC
3698 You
3699 @end ifclear
3700 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3701 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3702 @end ifset
3703 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3704 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3705 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3706 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3707 @smallexample
3708 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3709 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3710 .text 1
3711 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3712 .data 0
3713 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3714 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3715 .text 0
3716 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3717 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3718 @end smallexample
3719
3720 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3721 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3722 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3723 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3724 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3725 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3726 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3727
3728 @node bss
3729 @section bss Section
3730
3731 @cindex bss section
3732 @cindex common variable storage
3733 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3734 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3735 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3736 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3737 section are zeroed bytes.
3738
3739 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3740 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3741
3742 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3743 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3744
3745 @ifset GENERIC
3746 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3747 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3748 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3749 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3750 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3751 @end ifset
3752
3753 @node Symbols
3754 @chapter Symbols
3755
3756 @cindex symbols
3757 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3758 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3759 to debug.
3760
3761 @quotation
3762 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3763 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3764 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3765 @end quotation
3766
3767 @menu
3768 * Labels:: Labels
3769 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3770 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3771 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3772 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3773 @end menu
3774
3775 @node Labels
3776 @section Labels
3777
3778 @cindex labels
3779 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3780 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3781 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3782 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3783 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3784 definitions.
3785
3786 @ifset HPPA
3787 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3788 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3789 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3790 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3791 @end ifset
3792
3793 @node Setting Symbols
3794 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3795
3796 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3797 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3798 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3799 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3800 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3801 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3802 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3803 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3804
3805 @ifset Blackfin
3806 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3807 @end ifset
3808
3809 @node Symbol Names
3810 @section Symbol Names
3811
3812 @cindex symbol names
3813 @cindex names, symbol
3814 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3815 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3816 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3817 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3818 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3819 particular target machine), and underscores.
3820 @end ifclear
3821 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3822 @ifset H8
3823 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3824 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3825 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3826 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3827 @end ifset
3828 @end ifset
3829
3830 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3831 than @code{Foo}.
3832
3833 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3834 Local Labels. See below.
3835
3836 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3837 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3838 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3839 currently supported.
3840
3841 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3842 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3843 in a program.
3844
3845 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3846
3847 @cindex local symbol names
3848 @cindex symbol names, local
3849 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3850 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3851 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3852 set of local label prefixes.
3853 @ifset HPPA
3854 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3855 @end ifset
3856
3857 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3858 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3859 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3860 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3861
3862 @subheading Local Labels
3863
3864 @cindex local labels
3865 @cindex temporary symbol names
3866 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3867 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3868 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3869 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3870 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3871 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3872 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3873 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3874 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3875 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3876
3877 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3878 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3879 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3880 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3881 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3882 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3883 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3884
3885 Here is an example:
3886
3887 @smallexample
3888 1: branch 1f
3889 2: branch 1b
3890 1: branch 2f
3891 2: branch 1b
3892 @end smallexample
3893
3894 Which is the equivalent of:
3895
3896 @smallexample
3897 label_1: branch label_3
3898 label_2: branch label_1
3899 label_3: branch label_4
3900 label_4: branch label_3
3901 @end smallexample
3902
3903 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3904 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3905 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3906 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3907 these parts:
3908
3909 @table @code
3910 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3911 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3912 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3913 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3914 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3915 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3916 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3917 you may use them in debugging.
3918
3919 @item @var{number}
3920 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3921 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3922
3923 @item @kbd{C-B}
3924 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3925 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3926
3927 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3928 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3929 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3930 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3931 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3932 @end table
3933
3934 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3935 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3936
3937 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3938 @cindex dollar local symbols
3939
3940 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3941 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3942 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3943 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3944 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3945 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3946
3947 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3948 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3949 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3950
3951 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3952 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3953 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3954 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3955
3956 @node Dot
3957 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3958
3959 @cindex dot (symbol)
3960 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3961 @cindex current address
3962 @cindex location counter
3963 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3964 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3965 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3966 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3967 directive.
3968 @ifclear no-space-dir
3969 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3970 @samp{.space 4}.
3971 @end ifclear
3972
3973 @node Symbol Attributes
3974 @section Symbol Attributes
3975
3976 @cindex symbol attributes
3977 @cindex attributes, symbol
3978 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3979 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3980 attributes.
3981 @ifset INTERNALS
3982 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3983 @end ifset
3984
3985 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3986 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3987 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3988 would want.
3989
3990 @menu
3991 * Symbol Value:: Value
3992 * Symbol Type:: Type
3993 @ifset aout
3994 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3995 @end ifset
3996 @ifset COFF
3997 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3998 @end ifset
3999 @ifset SOM
4000 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
4001 @end ifset
4002 @end menu
4003
4004 @node Symbol Value
4005 @subsection Value
4006
4007 @cindex value of a symbol
4008 @cindex symbol value
4009 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
4010 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
4011 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
4012 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
4013 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
4014 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
4015 called absolute.
4016
4017 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
4018 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
4019 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
4020 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
4021 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
4022 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
4023 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
4024 allocated storage.
4025
4026 @node Symbol Type
4027 @subsection Type
4028
4029 @cindex type of a symbol
4030 @cindex symbol type
4031 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
4032 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
4033 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
4034 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
4035
4036 @ifset aout
4037 @node a.out Symbols
4038 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4039
4040 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4041 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4042
4043 @menu
4044 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4045 * Symbol Other:: Other
4046 @end menu
4047
4048 @node Symbol Desc
4049 @subsubsection Descriptor
4050
4051 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4052 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4053 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4054 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4055 @command{@value{AS}}.
4056
4057 @node Symbol Other
4058 @subsubsection Other
4059
4060 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4061 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4062 @end ifset
4063
4064 @ifset COFF
4065 @node COFF Symbols
4066 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4067
4068 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
4069 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4070
4071 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4072 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4073 @code{.endef} directives.
4074
4075 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
4076
4077 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4078 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4079 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4080
4081 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4082
4083 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4084 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4085 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4086 table information for COFF.
4087 @end ifset
4088
4089 @ifset SOM
4090 @node SOM Symbols
4091 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4092
4093 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4094 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4095
4096 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4097 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4098
4099 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4100 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4101 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4102 @end ifset
4103
4104 @node Expressions
4105 @chapter Expressions
4106
4107 @cindex expressions
4108 @cindex addresses
4109 @cindex numeric values
4110 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4111 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4112
4113 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4114 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4115 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4116 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4117 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4118 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4119
4120 @menu
4121 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4122 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4123 @end menu
4124
4125 @node Empty Exprs
4126 @section Empty Expressions
4127
4128 @cindex empty expressions
4129 @cindex expressions, empty
4130 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4131 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4132 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4133 is compatible with other assemblers.
4134
4135 @node Integer Exprs
4136 @section Integer Expressions
4137
4138 @cindex integer expressions
4139 @cindex expressions, integer
4140 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4141 by @emph{operators}.
4142
4143 @menu
4144 * Arguments:: Arguments
4145 * Operators:: Operators
4146 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4147 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4148 @end menu
4149
4150 @node Arguments
4151 @subsection Arguments
4152
4153 @cindex expression arguments
4154 @cindex arguments in expressions
4155 @cindex operands in expressions
4156 @cindex arithmetic operands
4157 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4158 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4159 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4160 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4161 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4162 instruction operands.
4163
4164 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4165 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4166 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4167 integer.
4168
4169 Numbers are usually integers.
4170
4171 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4172 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4173 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4174 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4175 assemblers.
4176
4177 @cindex subexpressions
4178 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4179 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4180 operator followed by an argument.
4181
4182 @node Operators
4183 @subsection Operators
4184
4185 @cindex operators, in expressions
4186 @cindex arithmetic functions
4187 @cindex functions, in expressions
4188 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4189 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4190 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4191 whitespace.
4192
4193 @node Prefix Ops
4194 @subsection Prefix Operator
4195
4196 @cindex prefix operators
4197 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4198 one argument, which must be absolute.
4199
4200 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4201 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4202 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4203 @tex
4204 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4205 @end tex
4206
4207 @table @code
4208 @item -
4209 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4210 @item ~
4211 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4212 @end table
4213
4214 @tex
4215 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4216 @end tex
4217
4218 @node Infix Ops
4219 @subsection Infix Operators
4220
4221 @cindex infix operators
4222 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4223 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4224 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4225 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4226 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4227
4228 @enumerate
4229 @cindex operator precedence
4230 @cindex precedence of operators
4231
4232 @item
4233 Highest Precedence
4234
4235 @table @code
4236 @item *
4237 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4238
4239 @item /
4240 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4241
4242 @item %
4243 @dfn{Remainder}.
4244
4245 @item <<
4246 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4247
4248 @item >>
4249 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4250 @end table
4251
4252 @item
4253 Intermediate precedence
4254
4255 @table @code
4256 @item |
4257
4258 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4259
4260 @item &
4261 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4262
4263 @item ^
4264 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4265
4266 @item !
4267 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4268 @end table
4269
4270 @item
4271 Low Precedence
4272
4273 @table @code
4274 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4275 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4276 @cindex arguments for addition
4277 @item +
4278 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4279 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4280 sections.
4281
4282 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4283 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4284 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4285 @item -
4286 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4287 result has the section of the left argument.
4288 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4289 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4290 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4291
4292 @cindex comparison expressions
4293 @cindex expressions, comparison
4294 @item ==
4295 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4296 @item <>
4297 @itemx !=
4298 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4299 @item <
4300 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4301 @item >
4302 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4303 @item >=
4304 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4305 @item <=
4306 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4307
4308 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4309 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4310 perform signed comparisons.
4311 @end table
4312
4313 @item Lowest Precedence
4314
4315 @table @code
4316 @item &&
4317 @dfn{Logical And}.
4318
4319 @item ||
4320 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4321
4322 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4323 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4324 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4325 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4326
4327 @end table
4328 @end enumerate
4329
4330 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4331 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4332
4333 @node Pseudo Ops
4334 @chapter Assembler Directives
4335
4336 @cindex directives, machine independent
4337 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4338 @cindex machine independent directives
4339 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4340 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4341 in lower case.
4342
4343 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4344 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4345 @ifset GENERIC
4346 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4347 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4348 @end ifset
4349 @ifclear GENERIC
4350 @ifset machine-directives
4351 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4352 @end ifset
4353 @end ifclear
4354
4355 @menu
4356 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4357 @ifset COFF
4358 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4359 @end ifset
4360
4361 * Align:: @code{.align [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4362 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4363 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4364 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4365 * Balign:: @code{.balign [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]}
4366 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4367 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4368 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4369 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4370 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4371 * Dc:: @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
4372 * Dcb:: @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4373 * Ds:: @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4374 @ifset COFF
4375 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4376 @end ifset
4377 @ifset aout
4378 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4379 @end ifset
4380 @ifset COFF
4381 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4382 @end ifset
4383
4384 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4385 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4386 * Else:: @code{.else}
4387 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4388 * End:: @code{.end}
4389 @ifset COFF
4390 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4391 @end ifset
4392
4393 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4394 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4395 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4396 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4397 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4398 * Err:: @code{.err}
4399 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4400 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4401 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4402 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4403 * File:: @code{.file}
4404 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4405 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4406 * Func:: @code{.func}
4407 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4408 @ifset ELF
4409 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4410 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4411 @end ifset
4412
4413 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4414 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4415 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4416 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4417 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4418 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4419 @ifset ELF
4420 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4421 @end ifset
4422
4423 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4424 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4425 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4426 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4427 @ifclear no-line-dir
4428 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4429 @end ifclear
4430
4431 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4432 * List:: @code{.list}
4433 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4434 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4435 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4436 @ifset ELF
4437 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4438 @end ifset
4439
4440 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4441 @ignore
4442 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4443 @end ignore
4444
4445 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4446 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4447 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4448 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4449 * Nop:: @code{.nop}
4450 * Nops:: @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
4451 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4452 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4453 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4454 * P2align:: @code{.p2align [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4455 @ifset ELF
4456 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4457 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4458 @end ifset
4459
4460 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4461 @ifset ELF
4462 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4463 @end ifset
4464
4465 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4466 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4467 @ifset ELF
4468 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4469 @end ifset
4470
4471 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4472 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4473 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4474 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4475 @ifset COFF
4476 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4477 @end ifset
4478 @ifset COFF-ELF
4479 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4480 @end ifset
4481
4482 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4483 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4484 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4485 @ifset COFF-ELF
4486 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4487 @end ifset
4488 @ifclear no-space-dir
4489 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4490 @end ifclear
4491
4492 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4493 @ifclear no-space-dir
4494 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4495 @end ifclear
4496 @ifset have-stabs
4497 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4498 @end ifset
4499
4500 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4501 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4502 @ifset ELF
4503 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4504 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}[,@var{visibility}]}
4505 @end ifset
4506
4507 @ifset COFF
4508 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4509 @end ifset
4510
4511 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4512 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4513 @ifset ELF
4514 * Tls_common:: @code{.tls_common @var{symbol}, @var{length}[, @var{alignment}]}
4515 @end ifset
4516 @ifset COFF-ELF
4517 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4518 @end ifset
4519
4520 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4521 @ifset COFF
4522 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4523 @end ifset
4524
4525 @ifset ELF
4526 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4527 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4528 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4529 @end ifset
4530
4531 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4532 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4533 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4534 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4535 @ifclear no-space-dir
4536 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4537 @end ifclear
4538 @ifset ELF
4539 * 2byte:: @code{.2byte @var{expressions}}
4540 * 4byte:: @code{.4byte @var{expressions}}
4541 * 8byte:: @code{.8byte @var{bignums}}
4542 @end ifset
4543 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4544 @end menu
4545
4546 @node Abort
4547 @section @code{.abort}
4548
4549 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4550 @cindex stopping the assembly
4551 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4552 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4553 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4554 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4555 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4556
4557 @ifset COFF
4558 @node ABORT (COFF)
4559 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4560
4561 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4562 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4563 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4564
4565 @end ifset
4566
4567 @node Align
4568 @section @code{.align [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4569
4570 @cindex padding the location counter
4571 @cindex @code{align} directive
4572 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4573 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4574 required, as described below. If this expression is omitted then a default
4575 value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
4576
4577 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4578 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4579 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4580 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4581 with no-op instructions.
4582
4583 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4584 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4585 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4586 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4587 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4588 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4589 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4590
4591 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4592 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4593 s390, sparc, tic4x and xtensa, the first expression is the
4594 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4595 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4596 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4597 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4598
4599 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4600 strongarm, it is the
4601 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4602 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4603 counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4604 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4605
4606 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4607 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4608 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4609 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4610 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4611
4612 @node Altmacro
4613 @section @code{.altmacro}
4614 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4615
4616 @ftable @code
4617 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4618 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4619 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4620 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4621 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4622 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4623 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4624
4625 @item String delimiters
4626 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4627 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4628
4629 @table @code
4630 @item '@var{string}'
4631 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4632
4633 @item <@var{string}>
4634 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4635 @end table
4636
4637 @item single-character string escape
4638 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4639 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4640 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4641 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4642
4643 @item Expression results as strings
4644 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4645 and use the result as a string.
4646 @end ftable
4647
4648 @node Ascii
4649 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4650
4651 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4652 @cindex string literals
4653 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4654 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4655 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4656
4657 @node Asciz
4658 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4659
4660 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4661 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4662 @cindex null-terminated strings
4663 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4664 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4665
4666 @node Balign
4667 @section @code{.balign[wl] [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4668
4669 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4670 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4671 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4672 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4673 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4674 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4675 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. If the expression is omitted
4676 then a default value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
4677
4678 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4679 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4680 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4681 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4682 with no-op instructions.
4683
4684 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4685 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4686 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4687 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4688 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4689 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4690 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4691
4692 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4693 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4694 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4695 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4696 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4697 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4698 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4699 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4700 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4701 undefined.
4702
4703 @node Bundle directives
4704 @section Bundle directives
4705 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4706 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4707 @cindex bundle
4708 @cindex instruction bundle
4709 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4710 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4711 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4712 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4713 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4714 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4715 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4716
4717 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4718 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4719 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4720 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4721 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4722 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4723 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4724 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4725 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4726 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4727 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4728
4729 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4730 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4731 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4732 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4733 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4734 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4735 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4736 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4737 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4738
4739 @cindex bundle-locked
4740 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4741 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4742 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4743 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4744 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4745 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4746 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4747 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4748 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4749 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4750 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4751 bundle size.
4752
4753 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4754 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4755 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4756 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4757 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4758 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4759
4760 @node Byte
4761 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4762
4763 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4764 @cindex integers, one byte
4765 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4766 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4767
4768 @node CFI directives
4769 @section CFI directives
4770 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4771 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4772 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4773 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4774 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4775 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4776 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4777 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4778
4779 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4780 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4781
4782 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4783 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4784
4785 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4786 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4787 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4788 redefine it will result in an error.
4789
4790 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4791 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4792 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4793 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4794 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4795 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4796
4797 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4798 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4799
4800 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4801 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4802 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4803 unwind entry previously opened by
4804 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4805
4806 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4807 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4808 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4809 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4810 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4811 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4812 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4813 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4814 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4815 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4816 no personality routine.
4817
4818 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4819 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4820 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4821 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4822 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4823 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4824
4825 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4826 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4827 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4828 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4829 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4830 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4831 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4832 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4833
4834 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4835 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4836 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4837 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4838 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4839 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4840 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4841
4842 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4843 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4844 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4845 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4846 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4847 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4848
4849 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4850 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4851 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4852 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4853 by a section directive.
4854
4855 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4856 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4857 @code{.p2align} directive.
4858
4859 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4860 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4861 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4862
4863 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4864 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4865 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4866 remains the same.
4867
4868 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4869 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4870 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4871 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4872 CFA address.
4873
4874 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4875 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4876 value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
4877
4878 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4879 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4880 CFA.
4881
4882 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4883 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4884
4885 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4886 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4887 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4888 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4889 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4890 code it's annotating.
4891
4892 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4893 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4894
4895 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4896 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4897 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4898 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4899
4900 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4901 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4902
4903 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4904 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4905 i.e. no restoration needed.
4906
4907 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4908 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4909 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4910 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4911 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4912 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4913 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4914
4915 @smallexample
4916 je label
4917 popq %rbx
4918 .cfi_restore %rbx
4919 popq %r12
4920 .cfi_restore %r12
4921 popq %rbp
4922 .cfi_restore %rbp
4923 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4924 ret
4925 label:
4926 /* Do something else */
4927 @end smallexample
4928
4929 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4930 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4931 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4932 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4933 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4934 we can write:
4935
4936 @smallexample
4937 je label
4938 popq %rbx
4939 .cfi_remember_state
4940 .cfi_restore %rbx
4941 popq %r12
4942 .cfi_restore %r12
4943 popq %rbp
4944 .cfi_restore %rbp
4945 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4946 ret
4947 label:
4948 .cfi_restore_state
4949 /* Do something else */
4950 @end smallexample
4951
4952 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4953 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4954 @code{.cfi} directives.
4955
4956 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4957 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4958 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4959
4960 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4961 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4962
4963 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4964 SPARC register window has been saved.
4965
4966 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4967 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4968 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4969 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4970
4971 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4972 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4973 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4974 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4975
4976 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4977 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4978 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4979 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4980 or another register.
4981
4982 @node Comm
4983 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4984
4985 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4986 @cindex symbol, common
4987 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4988 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4989 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4990 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4991 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4992 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4993 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4994 using the largest size.
4995
4996 @ifset COFF-ELF
4997 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4998 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4999 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
5000 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
5001 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
5002 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
5003 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
5004 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
5005 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
5006 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
5007 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
5008 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
5009 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
5010 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
5011 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
5012 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
5013 @end ifset
5014
5015 @ifset HPPA
5016 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5017 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5018 @end ifset
5019
5020 @node Data
5021 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
5022 @cindex @code{data} directive
5023
5024 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
5025 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
5026 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
5027 to zero.
5028
5029 @node Dc
5030 @section @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
5031 @cindex @code{dc} directive
5032
5033 The @code{.dc} directive expects zero or more @var{expressions} separated by
5034 commas. These expressions are evaluated and their values inserted into the
5035 current section. The size of the emitted value depends upon the suffix to the
5036 @code{.dc} directive:
5037
5038 @table @code
5039 @item @samp{.a}
5040 Emits N-bit values, where N is the size of an address on the target system.
5041 @item @samp{.b}
5042 Emits 8-bit values.
5043 @item @samp{.d}
5044 Emits double precision floating-point values.
5045 @item @samp{.l}
5046 Emits 32-bit values.
5047 @item @samp{.s}
5048 Emits single precision floating-point values.
5049 @item @samp{.w}
5050 Emits 16-bit values.
5051 Note - this is true even on targets where the @code{.word} directive would emit
5052 32-bit values.
5053 @item @samp{.x}
5054 Emits long double precision floating-point values.
5055 @end table
5056
5057 If no suffix is used then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5058
5059 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
5060 point values.
5061
5062 @node Dcb
5063 @section @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
5064 @cindex @code{dcb} directive
5065 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
5066 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
5067 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
5068 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
5069
5070 @table @code
5071 @item @samp{.b}
5072 Emits single byte values.
5073 @item @samp{.d}
5074 Emits double-precision floating point values.
5075 @item @samp{.l}
5076 Emits 4-byte values.
5077 @item @samp{.s}
5078 Emits single-precision floating point values.
5079 @item @samp{.w}
5080 Emits 2-byte values.
5081 @item @samp{.x}
5082 Emits long double-precision floating point values.
5083 @end table
5084
5085 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5086
5087 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
5088 point values.
5089
5090 @node Ds
5091 @section @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
5092 @cindex @code{ds} directive
5093 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
5094 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
5095 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
5096 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
5097
5098 @table @code
5099 @item @samp{.b}
5100 Emits single byte values.
5101 @item @samp{.d}
5102 Emits 8-byte values.
5103 @item @samp{.l}
5104 Emits 4-byte values.
5105 @item @samp{.p}
5106 Emits 12-byte values.
5107 @item @samp{.s}
5108 Emits 4-byte values.
5109 @item @samp{.w}
5110 Emits 2-byte values.
5111 @item @samp{.x}
5112 Emits 12-byte values.
5113 @end table
5114
5115 Note - unlike the @code{.dcb} directive the @samp{.d}, @samp{.s} and @samp{.x}
5116 suffixes do not indicate that floating-point values are to be inserted.
5117
5118 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5119
5120 The byte ordering is target dependent.
5121
5122
5123 @ifset COFF
5124 @node Def
5125 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
5126
5127 @cindex @code{def} directive
5128 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5129 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
5130 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5131 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5132 @end ifset
5133
5134 @ifset aout
5135 @node Desc
5136 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5137
5138 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5139 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5140 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5141 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5142 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5143
5144 @ifset COFF
5145 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5146 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5147 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5148 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5149 @end ifset
5150 @end ifset
5151
5152 @ifset COFF
5153 @node Dim
5154 @section @code{.dim}
5155
5156 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5157 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5158 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5159 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5160 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5161 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5162 @end ifset
5163
5164 @node Double
5165 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5166
5167 @cindex @code{double} directive
5168 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5169 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5170 assembles floating point numbers.
5171 @ifset GENERIC
5172 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5173 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5174 @end ifset
5175 @ifclear GENERIC
5176 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5177 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5178 in @sc{ieee} format.
5179 @end ifset
5180 @end ifclear
5181
5182 @node Eject
5183 @section @code{.eject}
5184
5185 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5186 @cindex new page, in listings
5187 @cindex page, in listings
5188 @cindex listing control: new page
5189 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5190
5191 @node Else
5192 @section @code{.else}
5193
5194 @cindex @code{else} directive
5195 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5196 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5197 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5198 was false.
5199
5200 @node Elseif
5201 @section @code{.elseif}
5202
5203 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5204 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5205 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5206 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5207
5208 @node End
5209 @section @code{.end}
5210
5211 @cindex @code{end} directive
5212 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5213 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5214
5215 @ifset COFF
5216 @node Endef
5217 @section @code{.endef}
5218
5219 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5220 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5221 @code{.def}.
5222 @end ifset
5223
5224 @node Endfunc
5225 @section @code{.endfunc}
5226 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5227 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5228
5229 @node Endif
5230 @section @code{.endif}
5231
5232 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5233 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5234 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5235 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5236
5237 @node Equ
5238 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5239
5240 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5241 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5242 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5243 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5244 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5245
5246 @ifset HPPA
5247 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5248 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5249 @end ifset
5250
5251 @ifset Z80
5252 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5253 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5254 On the Z80 it is an error if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5255 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5256 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5257 @end ifset
5258
5259 @node Equiv
5260 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5261 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5262 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5263 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5264 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5265 undefined.
5266
5267 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5268 @smallexample
5269 .ifdef SYM
5270 .err
5271 .endif
5272 .equ SYM,VAL
5273 @end smallexample
5274 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5275
5276 @node Eqv
5277 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5278 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5279 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5280 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5281 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5282 value is taken.
5283
5284 @node Err
5285 @section @code{.err}
5286 @cindex @code{err} directive
5287 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5288 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5289 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5290
5291 @node Error
5292 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5293 @cindex error directive
5294
5295 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5296 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5297 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5298 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5299
5300 @smallexample
5301 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5302 @end smallexample
5303
5304 @node Exitm
5305 @section @code{.exitm}
5306 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5307
5308 @node Extern
5309 @section @code{.extern}
5310
5311 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5312 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5313 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5314 all undefined symbols as external.
5315
5316 @node Fail
5317 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5318
5319 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5320 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5321 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5322 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5323 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5324 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5325
5326 @node File
5327 @section @code{.file}
5328 @cindex @code{file} directive
5329
5330 @ifclear no-file-dir
5331 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5332 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5333 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5334
5335 @subheading Default Version
5336
5337 @cindex logical file name
5338 @cindex file name, logical
5339 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5340 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5341
5342 @smallexample
5343 .file @var{string}
5344 @end smallexample
5345
5346 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5347 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5348 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5349 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5350 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5351
5352 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5353 @end ifclear
5354
5355 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5356 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5357
5358 @smallexample
5359 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5360 @end smallexample
5361
5362 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5363 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5364 literal enclosed in double quotes. The @var{filename} can include directory
5365 elements. If it does, then the directory will be added to the directory table
5366 and the basename will be added to the file table.
5367
5368 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5369 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5370 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5371 entries will have.
5372
5373 If DWARF-5 support has been enabled via the @option{-gdwarf-5} option then
5374 an extended version of the @code{file} is also allowed:
5375
5376 @smallexample
5377 .file @var{fileno} [@var{dirname}] @var{filename} [md5 @var{value}]
5378 @end smallexample
5379
5380 With this version a separate directory name is allowed, although if this is
5381 used then @var{filename} should not contain any directory components. In
5382 addtion an md5 hash value of the contents of @var{filename} can be provided.
5383 This will be stored in the the file table as well, and can be used by tools
5384 reading the debug information to verify that the contents of the source file
5385 match the contents of the compiled file.
5386
5387 @node Fill
5388 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5389
5390 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5391 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5392 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5393 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5394 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5395 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5396 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5397 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5398 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5399 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5400 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5401 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5402 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5403 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5404
5405 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5406 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5407 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5408 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5409
5410 @node Float
5411 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5412
5413 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5414 @cindex @code{float} directive
5415 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5416 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5417 @ifset GENERIC
5418 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5419 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5420 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5421 @end ifset
5422 @ifclear GENERIC
5423 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5424 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5425 in @sc{ieee} format.
5426 @end ifset
5427 @end ifclear
5428
5429 @node Func
5430 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5431 @cindex @code{func} directive
5432 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5433 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5434 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5435 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5436 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5437 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5438 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5439 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5440
5441 @node Global
5442 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5443
5444 @cindex @code{global} directive
5445 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5446 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5447 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5448 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5449 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5450 from another file linked into the same program.
5451
5452 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5453 compatibility with other assemblers.
5454
5455 @ifset HPPA
5456 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5457 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5458 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5459 @end ifset
5460
5461 @ifset ELF
5462 @node Gnu_attribute
5463 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5464 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5465
5466 @node Hidden
5467 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5468
5469 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5470 @cindex visibility
5471 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5472 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5473 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5474
5475 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5476 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5477 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5478 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5479 @end ifset
5480
5481 @node hword
5482 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5483
5484 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5485 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5486 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5487 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5488 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5489 a 16 bit number for each.
5490
5491 @ifset GENERIC
5492 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5493 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5494 @end ifset
5495 @ifclear GENERIC
5496 @ifset W32
5497 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5498 @end ifset
5499 @ifset W16
5500 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5501 @end ifset
5502 @end ifclear
5503
5504 @node Ident
5505 @section @code{.ident}
5506
5507 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5508
5509 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5510 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5511 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5512 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5513 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5514 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5515 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5516
5517 @node If
5518 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5519
5520 @cindex conditional assembly
5521 @cindex @code{if} directive
5522 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5523 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5524 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5525 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5526 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5527 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5528 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5529 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5530
5531 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5532 @table @code
5533 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5534 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5535 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5536 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5537 is considered to be undefined.
5538
5539 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5540 @item .ifb @var{text}
5541 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5542
5543 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5544 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5545 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5546 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5547 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5548 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5549 string comparison is case sensitive.
5550
5551 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5552 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5553 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5554
5555 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5556 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5557 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5558
5559 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5560 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5561 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5562 equal to zero.
5563
5564 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5565 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5566 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5567
5568 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5569 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5570 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5571 to zero.
5572
5573 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5574 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5575 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5576
5577 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5578 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5579 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5580 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5581
5582 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5583 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5584 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5585 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5586
5587 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5588 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5589 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5590 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5591 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5592 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5593 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5594
5595 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5596 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5597 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5598 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5599
5600 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5601 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5602 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5603 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5604 @end table
5605
5606 @node Incbin
5607 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5608
5609 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5610 @cindex binary files, including
5611 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5612 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5613 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5614 around @var{file}.
5615
5616 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5617 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5618 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5619 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5620 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5621
5622 @node Include
5623 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5624
5625 @cindex @code{include} directive
5626 @cindex supporting files, including
5627 @cindex files, including
5628 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5629 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5630 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5631 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5632 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5633 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5634 around @var{file}.
5635
5636 @node Int
5637 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5638
5639 @cindex @code{int} directive
5640 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5641 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5642 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5643 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5644 of target the assembly is for.
5645
5646 @ifclear GENERIC
5647 @ifset H8
5648 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5649 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5650 32-bit integers.
5651 @end ifset
5652 @end ifclear
5653
5654 @ifset ELF
5655 @node Internal
5656 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5657
5658 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5659 @cindex visibility
5660 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5661 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5662 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5663
5664 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5665 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5666 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5667 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5668 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5669 @end ifset
5670
5671 @node Irp
5672 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5673
5674 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5675 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5676 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5677 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5678 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5679 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5680 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5681 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5682
5683 For example, assembling
5684
5685 @example
5686 .irp param,1,2,3
5687 move d\param,sp@@-
5688 .endr
5689 @end example
5690
5691 is equivalent to assembling
5692
5693 @example
5694 move d1,sp@@-
5695 move d2,sp@@-
5696 move d3,sp@@-
5697 @end example
5698
5699 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5700
5701 @node Irpc
5702 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5703
5704 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5705 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5706 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5707 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5708 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5709 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5710 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5711 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5712
5713 For example, assembling
5714
5715 @example
5716 .irpc param,123
5717 move d\param,sp@@-
5718 .endr
5719 @end example
5720
5721 is equivalent to assembling
5722
5723 @example
5724 move d1,sp@@-
5725 move d2,sp@@-
5726 move d3,sp@@-
5727 @end example
5728
5729 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5730 at @xref{Macro}.
5731
5732 @node Lcomm
5733 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5734
5735 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5736 @cindex local common symbols
5737 @cindex symbols, local common
5738 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5739 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5740 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5741 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5742 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5743 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5744
5745 @ifset GENERIC
5746 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5747 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5748 @end ifset
5749
5750 @ifset HPPA
5751 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5752 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5753 @end ifset
5754
5755 @node Lflags
5756 @section @code{.lflags}
5757
5758 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5759 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5760 assemblers, but ignores it.
5761
5762 @ifclear no-line-dir
5763 @node Line
5764 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5765
5766 @cindex @code{line} directive
5767 @cindex logical line number
5768 @ifset aout
5769 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5770 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5771 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5772 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5773 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5774 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5775 @end ifset
5776
5777 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5778 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5779 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5780 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5781 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5782
5783 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5784 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5785 debugging.
5786 @end ifclear
5787
5788 @node Linkonce
5789 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5790 @cindex COMDAT
5791 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5792 @cindex common sections
5793 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5794 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5795 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5796 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5797 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5798 unique.
5799
5800 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5801 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5802 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5803
5804 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5805 following strings. For example:
5806 @smallexample
5807 .linkonce same_size
5808 @end smallexample
5809 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5810
5811 @table @code
5812 @item discard
5813 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5814
5815 @item one_only
5816 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5817
5818 @item same_size
5819 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5820
5821 @item same_contents
5822 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5823 @end table
5824
5825 @node List
5826 @section @code{.list}
5827
5828 @cindex @code{list} directive
5829 @cindex listing control, turning on
5830 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5831 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5832 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5833 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5834 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5835
5836 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5837 @samp{-a} command-line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5838 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5839
5840 @node Ln
5841 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5842
5843 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5844 @ifclear no-line-dir
5845 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5846 @end ifclear
5847 @ifset no-line-dir
5848 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5849 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5850 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5851 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5852 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5853 @end ifset
5854
5855 @node Loc
5856 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5857 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5858 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5859 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5860 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5861 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5862 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5863 the row is added. It is an error for the input assembly file to generate
5864 a non-empty @code{.debug_line} and also use @code{loc} directives.
5865
5866 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5867
5868 @table @code
5869 @item basic_block
5870 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5871 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5872
5873 @item prologue_end
5874 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5875 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5876
5877 @item epilogue_begin
5878 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5879 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5880
5881 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5882 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5883 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5884 either 0 or 1.
5885
5886 @item isa @var{value}
5887 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5888 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5889
5890 @item discriminator @var{value}
5891 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5892 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5893
5894 @item view @var{value}
5895 This option causes a row to be added to @code{.debug_line} in reference to the
5896 current address (which might not be the same as that of the following assembly
5897 instruction), and to associate @var{value} with the @code{view} register in the
5898 @code{.debug_line} state machine. If @var{value} is a label, both the
5899 @code{view} register and the label are set to the number of prior @code{.loc}
5900 directives at the same program location. If @var{value} is the literal
5901 @code{0}, the @code{view} register is set to zero, and the assembler asserts
5902 that there aren't any prior @code{.loc} directives at the same program
5903 location. If @var{value} is the literal @code{-0}, the assembler arrange for
5904 the @code{view} register to be reset in this row, even if there are prior
5905 @code{.loc} directives at the same program location.
5906
5907 @end table
5908
5909 @node Loc_mark_labels
5910 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5911 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5912 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5913 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5914 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5915 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5916 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5917 this function respectively.
5918
5919 @ifset ELF
5920 @node Local
5921 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5922
5923 @cindex @code{local} directive
5924 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5925 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5926 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5927 they will be created.
5928
5929 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5930 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5931 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5932 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5933 @end ifset
5934
5935 @node Long
5936 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5937
5938 @cindex @code{long} directive
5939 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5940
5941 @ignore
5942 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5943 @c what it really ought to do
5944 @node Lsym
5945 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5946
5947 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5948 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5949 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5950 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5951 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5952 the same as the expression value:
5953 @smallexample
5954 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5955 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5956 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5957 @end smallexample
5958 @noindent
5959 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5960 @end ignore
5961
5962 @node Macro
5963 @section @code{.macro}
5964
5965 @cindex macros
5966 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5967 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5968 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5969
5970 @example
5971 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5972 .long \from
5973 .if \to-\from
5974 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5975 .endif
5976 .endm
5977 @end example
5978
5979 @noindent
5980 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5981
5982 @example
5983 .long 0
5984 .long 1
5985 .long 2
5986 .long 3
5987 .long 4
5988 .long 5
5989 @end example
5990
5991 @ftable @code
5992 @item .macro @var{macname}
5993 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5994 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5995 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5996 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5997 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5998 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5999 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
6000 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
6001 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
6002 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
6003 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
6004 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
6005
6006 @table @code
6007 @item .macro comm
6008 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
6009 arguments.
6010
6011 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
6012 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
6013 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
6014 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
6015 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
6016
6017 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
6018 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
6019 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
6020 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
6021 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
6022 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
6023 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
6024 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
6025
6026 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
6027 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
6028 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
6029 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
6030 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
6031
6032 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
6033 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
6034 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
6035
6036 @end table
6037
6038 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
6039 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
6040 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
6041 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
6042 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
6043 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
6044 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
6045 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
6046 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
6047 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
6048 this macro definition:
6049
6050 @example
6051 .macro label l
6052 \l:
6053 .endm
6054 @end example
6055
6056 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
6057 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
6058 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
6059 identifier.
6060
6061 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
6062 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
6063 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
6064 length specifier like this:
6065
6066 @example
6067 .macro opcode base length
6068 \base.\length
6069 .endm
6070 @end example
6071
6072 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
6073 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
6074 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
6075
6076 There are several possible ways around this problem:
6077
6078 @table @code
6079 @item Insert white space
6080 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
6081 solution. eg:
6082
6083 @example
6084 .macro label l
6085 \l :
6086 .endm
6087 @end example
6088
6089 @item Use @samp{\()}
6090 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
6091 the following text. eg:
6092
6093 @example
6094 .macro opcode base length
6095 \base\().\length
6096 .endm
6097 @end example
6098
6099 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
6100 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
6101 used as a separator. eg:
6102
6103 @example
6104 .altmacro
6105 .macro label l
6106 l&:
6107 .endm
6108 @end example
6109 @end table
6110
6111 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
6112 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
6113 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
6114
6115 @item .endm
6116 @cindex @code{endm} directive
6117 Mark the end of a macro definition.
6118
6119 @item .exitm
6120 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
6121 Exit early from the current macro definition.
6122
6123 @cindex number of macros executed
6124 @cindex macros, count executed
6125 @item \@@
6126 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6127 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6128 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6129
6130 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6131 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6132 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6133 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6134 @end ftable
6135
6136 @node MRI
6137 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6138
6139 @cindex @code{mri} directive
6140 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6141 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
6142 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
6143 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6144 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6145
6146 @node Noaltmacro
6147 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
6148 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6149
6150 @node Nolist
6151 @section @code{.nolist}
6152
6153 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6154 @cindex listing control, turning off
6155 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6156 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6157 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6158 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6159 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6160
6161 @node Nop
6162 @section @code{.nop}
6163
6164 @cindex @code{nop} directive
6165 @cindex filling memory with no-op instructions
6166 This directive emits a single no-op instruction. It is provided on all
6167 architectures, allowing the creation of architecture neutral tests involving
6168 actual code. The size of the generated instruction is target specific. The
6169 instruction does affect the generation of DWARF debug line information.
6170
6171 @node Nops
6172 @section @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
6173
6174 @cindex @code{nops} directive
6175 @cindex filling memory with no-op instructions
6176 This directive emits no-op instructions. It is specific to the Intel 80386 and
6177 AMD x86-64 targets. It takes a @var{size} argument and generates @var{size}
6178 bytes of no-op instructions. @var{size} must be absolute and positive. These
6179 bytes do not affect the generation of DWARF debug line information.
6180
6181 The optional @var{control} argument specifies a size limit for a single no-op
6182 instruction. If not provided then a value of 0 is assumed. The valid values
6183 of @var{control} are between 0 and 4 in 16-bit mode, between 0 and 7 when
6184 tuning for older processors in 32-bit mode, between 0 and 11 in 64-bit mode or
6185 when tuning for newer processors in 32-bit mode. When 0 is used, the no-op
6186 instruction size limit is set to the maximum supported size.
6187
6188 @node Octa
6189 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6190
6191 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on some? Or warn?
6192 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6193 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6194 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6195 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6196 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6197
6198 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6199 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6200
6201 @node Offset
6202 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6203
6204 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6205 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6206 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6207 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6208 directive.
6209
6210 @node Org
6211 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6212
6213 @cindex @code{org} directive
6214 @cindex location counter, advancing
6215 @cindex advancing location counter
6216 @cindex current address, advancing
6217 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6218 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6219 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6220 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6221 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6222 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6223 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6224 is the same as the current subsection.
6225
6226 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6227 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6228 backwards.
6229
6230 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6231 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6232 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6233 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6234 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6235 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6236
6237 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6238 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6239 people's assemblers.
6240
6241 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6242 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6243 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6244 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6245
6246 @node P2align
6247 @section @code{.p2align[wl] [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
6248
6249 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6250 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6251 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6252 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6253 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6254 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6255 counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6256 multiple of 8, no change is needed. If the expression is omitted then a
6257 default value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
6258
6259 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6260 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6261 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
6262 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6263 with no-op instructions.
6264
6265 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6266 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6267 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6268 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6269 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6270 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6271 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6272
6273 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6274 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6275 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6276 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6277 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6278 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6279 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6280 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6281 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6282 undefined.
6283
6284 @ifset ELF
6285 @node PopSection
6286 @section @code{.popsection}
6287
6288 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6289 @cindex Section Stack
6290 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6291 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6292 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6293 (@pxref{Previous}).
6294
6295 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6296 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6297 stack.
6298 @end ifset
6299
6300 @ifset ELF
6301 @node Previous
6302 @section @code{.previous}
6303
6304 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6305 @cindex Section Stack
6306 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6307 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6308 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6309 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6310
6311 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6312 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6313 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6314 subsections). For example:
6315
6316 @smallexample
6317 .section A
6318 .subsection 1
6319 .word 0x1234
6320 .subsection 2
6321 .word 0x5678
6322 .previous
6323 .word 0x9abc
6324 @end smallexample
6325
6326 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6327 section A. Whilst:
6328
6329 @smallexample
6330 .section A
6331 .subsection 1
6332 # Now in section A subsection 1
6333 .word 0x1234
6334 .section B
6335 .subsection 0
6336 # Now in section B subsection 0
6337 .word 0x5678
6338 .subsection 1
6339 # Now in section B subsection 1
6340 .word 0x9abc
6341 .previous
6342 # Now in section B subsection 0
6343 .word 0xdef0
6344 @end smallexample
6345
6346 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6347 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6348
6349 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6350 the top section on the section stack.
6351 @end ifset
6352
6353 @node Print
6354 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6355
6356 @cindex @code{print} directive
6357 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6358 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6359
6360 @ifset ELF
6361 @node Protected
6362 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6363
6364 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6365 @cindex visibility
6366 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6367 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6368
6369 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6370 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6371 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6372 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6373 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6374 this.
6375 @end ifset
6376
6377 @node Psize
6378 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6379
6380 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6381 @cindex listing control: paper size
6382 @cindex paper size, for listings
6383 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6384 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6385
6386 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6387 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6388 default width is 200 columns.
6389
6390 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6391 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6392 @code{.eject}).
6393
6394 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6395 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6396
6397 @node Purgem
6398 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6399
6400 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6401 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6402 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6403
6404 @ifset ELF
6405 @node PushSection
6406 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6407
6408 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6409 @cindex Section Stack
6410 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6411 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6412 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6413 (@pxref{Previous}).
6414
6415 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6416 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6417 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6418 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6419 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6420 @end ifset
6421
6422 @node Quad
6423 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6424
6425 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6426 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6427 each bignum, it emits
6428 @ifclear bignum-16
6429 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6430 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6431 @cindex eight-byte integer
6432 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6433
6434 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6435 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6436 @end ifclear
6437 @ifset bignum-16
6438 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6439 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6440 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6441 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6442 @end ifset
6443
6444 @node Reloc
6445 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6446
6447 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6448 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6449 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6450 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6451 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6452 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6453 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6454 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6455 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6456 section.
6457
6458 @node Rept
6459 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6460
6461 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6462 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6463 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6464
6465 For example, assembling
6466
6467 @example
6468 .rept 3
6469 .long 0
6470 .endr
6471 @end example
6472
6473 is equivalent to assembling
6474
6475 @example
6476 .long 0
6477 .long 0
6478 .long 0
6479 @end example
6480
6481 A count of zero is allowed, but nothing is generated. Negative counts are not
6482 allowed and if encountered will be treated as if they were zero.
6483
6484 @node Sbttl
6485 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6486
6487 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6488 @cindex subtitles for listings
6489 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6490 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6491 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6492
6493 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6494 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6495
6496 @ifset COFF
6497 @node Scl
6498 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6499
6500 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6501 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6502 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6503 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6504 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6505 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6506 symbolic debugging information.
6507 @end ifset
6508
6509 @ifset COFF-ELF
6510 @node Section
6511 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6512
6513 @cindex named section
6514 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6515 named @var{name}.
6516
6517 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6518 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6519 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6520
6521 @ifset COFF
6522 @ifset ELF
6523 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6524 @subheading COFF Version
6525 @end ifset
6526
6527 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6528 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6529 ways:
6530
6531 @smallexample
6532 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6533 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6534 @end smallexample
6535
6536 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6537 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6538
6539 @table @code
6540 @item b
6541 bss section (uninitialized data)
6542 @item n
6543 section is not loaded
6544 @item w
6545 writable section
6546 @item d
6547 data section
6548 @item e
6549 exclude section from linking
6550 @item r
6551 read-only section
6552 @item x
6553 executable section
6554 @item s
6555 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6556 @item a
6557 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6558 @item y
6559 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6560 @item 0-9
6561 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6562 @end table
6563
6564 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6565 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6566 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6567 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6568 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6569
6570 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6571 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6572 @end ifset
6573
6574 @ifset ELF
6575 @ifset COFF
6576 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6577 @subheading ELF Version
6578 @end ifset
6579
6580 @cindex Section Stack
6581 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6582 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6583 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6584 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6585
6586 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6587 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6588
6589 @smallexample
6590 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6591 @end smallexample
6592
6593 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6594 @kindex --sectname-subst
6595 @cindex section name substitution
6596 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6597 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6598 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6599
6600 @smallexample
6601 .macro exception_code
6602 .section %S.exception
6603 [exception code here]
6604 .previous
6605 .endm
6606
6607 .text
6608 [code]
6609 exception_code
6610 [...]
6611
6612 .section .init
6613 [init code]
6614 exception_code
6615 [...]
6616 @end smallexample
6617
6618 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6619 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6620 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
6621 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
6622 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6623 macros just for that purpose.
6624
6625 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6626 combination of the following characters:
6627
6628 @table @code
6629 @item a
6630 section is allocatable
6631 @item d
6632 section is a GNU_MBIND section
6633 @item e
6634 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6635 @item o
6636 section references a symbol defined in another section (the linked-to
6637 section) in the same file.
6638 @item w
6639 section is writable
6640 @item x
6641 section is executable
6642 @item M
6643 section is mergeable
6644 @item S
6645 section contains zero terminated strings
6646 @item G
6647 section is a member of a section group
6648 @item T
6649 section is used for thread-local-storage
6650 @item ?
6651 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6652 @item @code{<number>}
6653 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6654 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6655 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6656 resulting value.
6657 @item @code{<target specific>}
6658 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6659 @end table
6660
6661 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6662 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6663 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6664 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6665 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6666 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6667
6668 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6669
6670 @table @code
6671 @item @@progbits
6672 section contains data
6673 @item @@nobits
6674 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6675 @item @@note
6676 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6677 @item @@init_array
6678 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6679 @item @@fini_array
6680 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6681 @item @@preinit_array
6682 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6683 @item @@@code{<number>}
6684 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6685 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6686 some targets extend this list with their own types
6687 @end table
6688
6689 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6690 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6691
6692 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6693 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6694 @code{%} character.
6695
6696 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6697 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6698 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6699
6700 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6701 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6702
6703 @smallexample
6704 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6705 @end smallexample
6706
6707 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6708 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6709 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6710 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6711 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6712 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6713 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6714 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6715 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6716
6717 If @var{flags} contains the @code{o} flag, then the @var{type} argument
6718 must be present along with an additional field like this:
6719
6720 @smallexample
6721 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"o,@@@var{type},@var{SymbolName}
6722 @end smallexample
6723
6724 The @var{SymbolName} field specifies the symbol name which the section
6725 references.
6726
6727 Note: If both the @var{M} and @var{o} flags are present, then the fields
6728 for the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6729
6730 @smallexample
6731 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"Mo,@@@var{type},@var{entsize},@var{SymbolName}
6732 @end smallexample
6733
6734 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6735 be present along with an additional field like this:
6736
6737 @smallexample
6738 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6739 @end smallexample
6740
6741 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6742 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6743
6744 @table @code
6745 @item comdat
6746 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6747 @item .gnu.linkonce
6748 an alias for comdat
6749 @end table
6750
6751 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6752 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6753
6754 @smallexample
6755 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6756 @end smallexample
6757
6758 If both @code{o} flag and @code{G} flag are present, then the
6759 @var{SymbolName} field for @code{o} comes first, like this:
6760
6761 @smallexample
6762 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"oG,@@@var{type},@var{SymbolName},@var{GroupName}[,@var{linkage}]
6763 @end smallexample
6764
6765 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6766 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6767 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6768 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6769 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6770 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6771
6772 The optional @var{unique,@code{<number>}} argument must come last. It
6773 assigns @var{@code{<number>}} as a unique section ID to distinguish
6774 different sections with the same section name like these:
6775
6776 @smallexample
6777 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}",@@@var{type},@var{unique,@code{<number>}}
6778 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"G,@@@var{type},@var{GroupName},[@var{linkage}],@var{unique,@code{<number>}}
6779 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"MG,@@@var{type},@var{entsize},@var{GroupName}[,@var{linkage}],@var{unique,@code{<number>}}
6780 @end smallexample
6781
6782 The valid values of @var{@code{<number>}} are between 0 and 4294967295.
6783
6784 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6785 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6786 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6787 executable. The section will contain data.
6788
6789 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6790 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6791
6792 @smallexample
6793 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6794 @end smallexample
6795
6796 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6797 separated flags:
6798
6799 @table @code
6800 @item #alloc
6801 section is allocatable
6802 @item #write
6803 section is writable
6804 @item #execinstr
6805 section is executable
6806 @item #exclude
6807 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6808 @item #tls
6809 section is used for thread local storage
6810 @end table
6811
6812 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6813 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6814 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6815 work.
6816 @end ifset
6817 @end ifset
6818
6819 @node Set
6820 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6821
6822 @cindex @code{set} directive
6823 @cindex symbol value, setting
6824 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6825 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6826 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6827 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6828
6829 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6830 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6831 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6832 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6833 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6834 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6835 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6836 different symbols.
6837
6838 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6839 file is the last value stored into it.
6840
6841 @ifset Z80
6842 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use @code{.set} or
6843 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6844 @end ifset
6845
6846 @node Short
6847 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6848
6849 @cindex @code{short} directive
6850 @ifset GENERIC
6851 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6852 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6853
6854 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6855 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6856 @end ifset
6857 @ifclear GENERIC
6858 @ifset W16
6859 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6860 @end ifset
6861 @ifset W32
6862 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6863 a 16 bit number for each.
6864 @end ifset
6865 @end ifclear
6866
6867 @node Single
6868 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6869
6870 @cindex @code{single} directive
6871 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6872 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6873 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6874 @ifset GENERIC
6875 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6876 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6877 @end ifset
6878 @ifclear GENERIC
6879 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6880 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6881 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6882 @end ifset
6883 @end ifclear
6884
6885 @ifset COFF-ELF
6886 @node Size
6887 @section @code{.size}
6888
6889 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6890
6891 @ifset COFF
6892 @ifset ELF
6893 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6894 @subheading COFF Version
6895 @end ifset
6896
6897 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6898 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6899 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6900
6901 @smallexample
6902 .size @var{expression}
6903 @end smallexample
6904
6905 @end ifset
6906
6907 @ifset ELF
6908 @ifset COFF
6909 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6910 @subheading ELF Version
6911 @end ifset
6912
6913 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6914 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6915
6916 @smallexample
6917 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6918 @end smallexample
6919
6920 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6921 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6922 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6923 symbols.
6924 @end ifset
6925 @end ifset
6926
6927 @ifclear no-space-dir
6928 @node Skip
6929 @section @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
6930
6931 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6932 @cindex filling memory
6933 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6934 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6935 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6936 @samp{.space}.
6937 @end ifclear
6938
6939 @node Sleb128
6940 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6941
6942 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6943 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6944 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6945 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6946
6947 @ifclear no-space-dir
6948 @node Space
6949 @section @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
6950
6951 @cindex @code{space} directive
6952 @cindex filling memory
6953 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6954 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6955 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6956 as @samp{.skip}.
6957
6958 @ifset HPPA
6959 @quotation
6960 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6961 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6962 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6963 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6964 for a summary.
6965 @end quotation
6966 @end ifset
6967 @end ifclear
6968
6969 @ifset have-stabs
6970 @node Stab
6971 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6972
6973 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6974 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6975 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6976 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6977 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6978 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6979 Up to five fields are required:
6980
6981 @table @var
6982 @item string
6983 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6984 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6985 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6986 using this field.
6987
6988 @item type
6989 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6990 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6991 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6992
6993 @item other
6994 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6995 low 8 bits of this expression.
6996
6997 @item desc
6998 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6999 bits of this expression.
7000
7001 @item value
7002 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
7003 @end table
7004
7005 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
7006 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
7007 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
7008 compatible with earlier assemblers!
7009
7010 @table @code
7011 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
7012 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
7013
7014 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
7015 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
7016 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
7017 strings.
7018
7019 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
7020 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
7021 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
7022 assembled.
7023
7024 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
7025 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
7026 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
7027
7028 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
7029 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
7030 All five fields are specified.
7031 @end table
7032 @end ifset
7033 @c end have-stabs
7034
7035 @node String
7036 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
7037 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
7038
7039 @cindex string, copying to object file
7040 @cindex string8, copying to object file
7041 @cindex string16, copying to object file
7042 @cindex string32, copying to object file
7043 @cindex string64, copying to object file
7044 @cindex @code{string} directive
7045 @cindex @code{string8} directive
7046 @cindex @code{string16} directive
7047 @cindex @code{string32} directive
7048 @cindex @code{string64} directive
7049
7050 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
7051 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
7052 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
7053 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
7054
7055 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
7056 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
7057 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
7058 are stored in target endianness byte order.
7059
7060 Example:
7061 @smallexample
7062 .string32 "BYE"
7063 expands to:
7064 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
7065 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
7066 @end smallexample
7067
7068
7069 @node Struct
7070 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
7071
7072 @cindex @code{struct} directive
7073 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
7074 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
7075 @smallexample
7076 .struct 0
7077 field1:
7078 .struct field1 + 4
7079 field2:
7080 .struct field2 + 4
7081 field3:
7082 @end smallexample
7083 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
7084 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
7085 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
7086 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
7087 before further assembly.
7088
7089 @ifset ELF
7090 @node SubSection
7091 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
7092
7093 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
7094 @cindex Section Stack
7095 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
7096 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
7097 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
7098 (@pxref{Previous}).
7099
7100 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
7101 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
7102 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
7103 @end ifset
7104
7105 @ifset ELF
7106 @node Symver
7107 @section @code{.symver}
7108 @cindex @code{symver} directive
7109 @cindex symbol versioning
7110 @cindex versions of symbols
7111 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
7112 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
7113 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
7114 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
7115 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
7116 shared library.
7117
7118 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
7119 @smallexample
7120 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}[ ,@var{visibility}]
7121 @end smallexample
7122 If the original symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
7123 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
7124 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
7125 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
7126 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
7127 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
7128 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
7129 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
7130 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
7131 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
7132 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
7133 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
7134 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
7135 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override. The optional argument
7136 @var{visibility} updates the visibility of the original symbol. The valid
7137 visibilities are @code{local}, @code{hidden}, and @code{remove}. The
7138 @code{local} visibility makes the original symbol a local symbol
7139 (@pxref{Local}). The @code{hidden} visibility sets the visibility of the
7140 original symbol to @code{hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}). The @code{remove}
7141 visibility removes the original symbol from the symbol table. If visibility
7142 isn't specified, the original symbol is unchanged.
7143
7144 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
7145 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
7146 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
7147 symbol table.
7148
7149 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7150 @smallexample
7151 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
7152 @end smallexample
7153 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
7154 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
7155 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
7156 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
7157
7158 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7159 @smallexample
7160 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
7161 @end smallexample
7162 When @var{name} is not defined within the
7163 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
7164 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
7165 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
7166 @end ifset
7167
7168 @ifset COFF
7169 @node Tag
7170 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
7171
7172 @cindex COFF structure debugging
7173 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
7174 @cindex @code{tag} directive
7175 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
7176 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
7177 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
7178 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
7179 @end ifset
7180
7181 @node Text
7182 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
7183
7184 @cindex @code{text} directive
7185 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7186 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7187 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7188 is used.
7189
7190 @node Title
7191 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7192
7193 @cindex @code{title} directive
7194 @cindex listing control: title line
7195 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7196 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7197
7198 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7199 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7200
7201 @ifset ELF
7202 @node Tls_common
7203 @section @code{.tls_common @var{symbol}, @var{length}[, @var{alignment}]}
7204
7205 @cindex @code{tls_common} directive
7206 This directive behaves in the same way as the @code{.comm} directive
7207 (@pxref{Comm}) except that @var{symbol} has type of STT_TLS instead of
7208 STT_OBJECT.
7209 @end ifset
7210
7211 @ifset COFF-ELF
7212 @node Type
7213 @section @code{.type}
7214
7215 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7216
7217 @ifset COFF
7218 @ifset ELF
7219 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7220 @subheading COFF Version
7221 @end ifset
7222
7223 @cindex COFF symbol type
7224 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7225 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7226 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7227 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7228
7229 @smallexample
7230 .type @var{int}
7231 @end smallexample
7232
7233 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7234 entry.
7235
7236 @end ifset
7237
7238 @ifset ELF
7239 @ifset COFF
7240 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7241 @subheading ELF Version
7242 @end ifset
7243
7244 @cindex ELF symbol type
7245 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7246 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7247 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7248
7249 @smallexample
7250 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7251 @end smallexample
7252
7253 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7254 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7255 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7256 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7257
7258 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7259 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7260 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7261 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7262 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7263 assemblers.
7264
7265 The syntaxes supported are:
7266
7267 @smallexample
7268 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7269 .type <name>,#<type>
7270 .type <name>,@@<type>
7271 .type <name>,%<type>
7272 .type <name>,"<type>"
7273 @end smallexample
7274
7275 The types supported are:
7276
7277 @table @gcctabopt
7278 @item STT_FUNC
7279 @itemx function
7280 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7281
7282 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7283 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7284 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7285 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7286
7287 @item STT_OBJECT
7288 @itemx object
7289 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7290
7291 @item STT_TLS
7292 @itemx tls_object
7293 Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
7294
7295 @item STT_COMMON
7296 @itemx common
7297 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7298
7299 @item STT_NOTYPE
7300 @itemx notype
7301 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7302
7303 @item gnu_unique_object
7304 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7305 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7306 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7307 systems).
7308
7309 @end table
7310
7311 Changing between incompatible types other than from/to STT_NOTYPE will
7312 result in a diagnostic. An intermediate change to STT_NOTYPE will silence
7313 this.
7314
7315 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7316
7317 @end ifset
7318 @end ifset
7319
7320 @node Uleb128
7321 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7322
7323 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7324 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7325 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7326 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7327
7328 @ifset COFF
7329 @node Val
7330 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7331
7332 @cindex @code{val} directive
7333 @cindex COFF value attribute
7334 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7335 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7336 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7337 entry.
7338 @end ifset
7339
7340 @ifset ELF
7341 @node Version
7342 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7343
7344 @cindex @code{version} directive
7345 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7346 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7347 @end ifset
7348
7349 @ifset ELF
7350 @node VTableEntry
7351 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7352
7353 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7354 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7355 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7356
7357 @node VTableInherit
7358 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7359
7360 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7361 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7362 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7363 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7364 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7365 @end ifset
7366
7367 @node Warning
7368 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7369 @cindex warning directive
7370 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7371 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7372
7373 @node Weak
7374 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7375
7376 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7377 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7378 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7379
7380 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7381 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7382 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7383
7384 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7385 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7386 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7387
7388 @node Weakref
7389 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7390
7391 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7392 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7393 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7394 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7395 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7396 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7397
7398 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7399 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7400 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7401 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7402 had the references to the alias removed.
7403
7404 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7405 within the assembler.
7406
7407 @node Word
7408 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7409
7410 @cindex @code{word} directive
7411 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7412 separated by commas.
7413 @ifclear GENERIC
7414 @ifset W32
7415 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7416 @end ifset
7417 @ifset W16
7418 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7419 @end ifset
7420 @end ifclear
7421 @ifset GENERIC
7422
7423 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7424 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7425 @end ifset
7426
7427 @c on sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7428 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7429 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7430 @cindex difference tables altered
7431 @cindex altered difference tables
7432 @quotation
7433 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7434 @end quotation
7435
7436 @ifset GENERIC
7437 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7438 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7439 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7440 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7441
7442 @end ifset
7443 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7444 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7445 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7446 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7447 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7448 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7449 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7450 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7451 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7452 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7453 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7454 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7455 @code{sym2}.
7456
7457 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7458 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7459 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7460 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7461 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7462 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7463 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7464
7465 @ifset INTERNALS
7466 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7467 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7468 assembly language programmers.
7469 @end ifset
7470 @end ifset
7471 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7472
7473 @ifclear no-space-dir
7474 @node Zero
7475 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7476
7477 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7478 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7479 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7480 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7481 so it can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7482 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7483 @end ifclear
7484
7485 @ifset ELF
7486 @node 2byte
7487 @section @code{.2byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7488 @cindex @code{2byte} directive
7489 @cindex two-byte integer
7490 @cindex integer, 2-byte
7491
7492 This directive expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. If there
7493 are no expressions then the directive does nothing. Otherwise each expression
7494 is evaluated in turn and placed in the next two bytes of the current output
7495 section, using the endian model of the target. If an expression will not fit
7496 in two bytes, a warning message is displayed and the least significant two
7497 bytes of the expression's value are used. If an expression cannot be evaluated
7498 at assembly time then relocations will be generated in order to compute the
7499 value at link time.
7500
7501 This directive does not apply any alignment before or after inserting the
7502 values. As a result of this, if relocations are generated, they may be
7503 different from those used for inserting values with a guaranteed alignment.
7504
7505 This directive is only available for ELF targets,
7506
7507 @node 4byte
7508 @section @code{.4byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7509 @cindex @code{4byte} directive
7510 @cindex four-byte integer
7511 @cindex integer, 4-byte
7512
7513 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, four byte
7514 long values into the output.
7515
7516 @node 8byte
7517 @section @code{.8byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7518 @cindex @code{8byte} directive
7519 @cindex eight-byte integer
7520 @cindex integer, 8-byte
7521
7522 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, eight
7523 byte long bignum values into the output.
7524
7525 @end ifset
7526
7527 @node Deprecated
7528 @section Deprecated Directives
7529
7530 @cindex deprecated directives
7531 @cindex obsolescent directives
7532 One day these directives won't work.
7533 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7534 @table @t
7535 @item .abort
7536 @item .line
7537 @end table
7538
7539 @ifset ELF
7540 @node Object Attributes
7541 @chapter Object Attributes
7542 @cindex object attributes
7543
7544 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7545 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7546 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7547 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7548 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7549 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7550 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7551 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7552 newer generation at run-time.
7553
7554 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7555 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7556 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7557 correctly.
7558
7559 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7560 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7561 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7562 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7563 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7564 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7565
7566 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7567 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7568
7569 @menu
7570 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7571 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7572 @end menu
7573
7574 @node GNU Object Attributes
7575 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7576
7577 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7578 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7579
7580 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7581 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7582 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7583 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7584 architecture-dependent ones.
7585
7586 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7587
7588 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7589
7590 @table @r
7591 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7592 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7593 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7594 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7595 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7596 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7597 @end table
7598
7599 @subsection M680x0 Attributes
7600
7601 @table @r
7602 @item Tag_GNU_M68K_ABI_FP (4)
7603 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7604
7605 @itemize @bullet
7606 @item
7607 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7608 @item
7609 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7610 @item
7611 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7612 @end itemize
7613 @end table
7614
7615 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7616
7617 @table @r
7618 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7619 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7620
7621 @itemize @bullet
7622 @item
7623 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7624 @item
7625 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7626 double-precision FPU.
7627 @item
7628 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7629 @item
7630 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7631 @item
7632 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7633 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7634 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7635 @item
7636 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7637 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7638 general-purpose registers.
7639 @item
7640 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7641 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7642 @item
7643 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7644 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7645 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7646 @end itemize
7647 @end table
7648
7649 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7650
7651 @table @r
7652 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7653 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7654
7655 @itemize @bullet
7656 @item
7657 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7658 @item
7659 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7660 @item
7661 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7662 @item
7663 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7664 @end itemize
7665
7666 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7667 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7668
7669 @itemize @bullet
7670 @item
7671 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7672 @item
7673 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7674 @item
7675 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7676 @item
7677 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7678 @end itemize
7679 @end table
7680
7681 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7682
7683 @table @r
7684 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7685 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7686
7687 @itemize @bullet
7688 @item
7689 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7690 @item
7691 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7692 @item
7693 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7694 @end itemize
7695 @end table
7696
7697 @subsection MSP430 Attributes
7698
7699 @table @r
7700 @item Tag_GNU_MSP430_Data_Region (4)
7701 The data region used by this object file. The value will be:
7702
7703 @itemize @bullet
7704 @item
7705 0 for files not using the large memory model.
7706 @item
7707 1 for files which have been compiled with the condition that all
7708 data is in the lower memory region, i.e. below address 0x10000.
7709 @item
7710 2 for files which allow data to be placed in the full 20-bit memory range.
7711 @end itemize
7712 @end table
7713
7714 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7715 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7716
7717 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7718 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7719 mailing list.
7720
7721 @itemize @bullet
7722 @item
7723 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7724 @item
7725 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7726 @item
7727 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7728 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7729 @item
7730 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7731 @item
7732 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7733 @item
7734 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7735 @end itemize
7736
7737 @end ifset
7738
7739 @ifset GENERIC
7740 @node Machine Dependencies
7741 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7742
7743 @cindex machine dependencies
7744 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7745 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7746 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7747 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7748 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7749 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7750 optimization.
7751
7752 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7753 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7754 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7755
7756 @menu
7757 @ifset AARCH64
7758 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7759 @end ifset
7760 @ifset ALPHA
7761 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7762 @end ifset
7763 @ifset ARC
7764 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7765 @end ifset
7766 @ifset ARM
7767 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7768 @end ifset
7769 @ifset AVR
7770 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7771 @end ifset
7772 @ifset Blackfin
7773 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7774 @end ifset
7775 @ifset BPF
7776 * BPF-Dependent:: BPF Dependent Features
7777 @end ifset
7778 @ifset CR16
7779 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7780 @end ifset
7781 @ifset CRIS
7782 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7783 @end ifset
7784 @ifset CSKY
7785 * C-SKY-Dependent:: C-SKY Dependent Features
7786 @end ifset
7787 @ifset D10V
7788 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7789 @end ifset
7790 @ifset D30V
7791 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7792 @end ifset
7793 @ifset EPIPHANY
7794 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7795 @end ifset
7796 @ifset H8/300
7797 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7798 @end ifset
7799 @ifset HPPA
7800 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7801 @end ifset
7802 @ifset I80386
7803 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7804 @end ifset
7805 @ifset IA64
7806 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7807 @end ifset
7808 @ifset IP2K
7809 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7810 @end ifset
7811 @ifset LM32
7812 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7813 @end ifset
7814 @ifset M32C
7815 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7816 @end ifset
7817 @ifset M32R
7818 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7819 @end ifset
7820 @ifset M680X0
7821 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7822 @end ifset
7823 @ifset M68HC11
7824 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7825 @end ifset
7826 @ifset S12Z
7827 * S12Z-Dependent:: S12Z Dependent Features
7828 @end ifset
7829 @ifset METAG
7830 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7831 @end ifset
7832 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7833 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7834 @end ifset
7835 @ifset MIPS
7836 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7837 @end ifset
7838 @ifset MMIX
7839 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7840 @end ifset
7841 @ifset MSP430
7842 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7843 @end ifset
7844 @ifset NDS32
7845 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7846 @end ifset
7847 @ifset NIOSII
7848 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7849 @end ifset
7850 @ifset NS32K
7851 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7852 @end ifset
7853 @ifset OPENRISC
7854 * OpenRISC-Dependent:: OpenRISC 1000 Features
7855 @end ifset
7856 @ifset PDP11
7857 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7858 @end ifset
7859 @ifset PJ
7860 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7861 @end ifset
7862 @ifset PPC
7863 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7864 @end ifset
7865 @ifset PRU
7866 * PRU-Dependent:: PRU Dependent Features
7867 @end ifset
7868 @ifset RISCV
7869 * RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7870 @end ifset
7871 @ifset RL78
7872 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7873 @end ifset
7874 @ifset RX
7875 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7876 @end ifset
7877 @ifset S390
7878 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7879 @end ifset
7880 @ifset SCORE
7881 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7882 @end ifset
7883 @ifset SH
7884 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7885 @end ifset
7886 @ifset SPARC
7887 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7888 @end ifset
7889 @ifset TIC54X
7890 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7891 @end ifset
7892 @ifset TIC6X
7893 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7894 @end ifset
7895 @ifset TILEGX
7896 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7897 @end ifset
7898 @ifset TILEPRO
7899 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7900 @end ifset
7901 @ifset V850
7902 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7903 @end ifset
7904 @ifset VAX
7905 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7906 @end ifset
7907 @ifset VISIUM
7908 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7909 @end ifset
7910 @ifset WASM32
7911 * WebAssembly-Dependent:: WebAssembly Dependent Features
7912 @end ifset
7913 @ifset XGATE
7914 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Dependent Features
7915 @end ifset
7916 @ifset XSTORMY16
7917 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7918 @end ifset
7919 @ifset XTENSA
7920 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7921 @end ifset
7922 @ifset Z80
7923 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7924 @end ifset
7925 @ifset Z8000
7926 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7927 @end ifset
7928 @end menu
7929
7930 @lowersections
7931 @end ifset
7932
7933 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7934 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7935 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7936 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7937 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7938 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7939 @c in both conditional blocks.
7940
7941 @ifset AARCH64
7942 @include c-aarch64.texi
7943 @end ifset
7944
7945 @ifset ALPHA
7946 @include c-alpha.texi
7947 @end ifset
7948
7949 @ifset ARC
7950 @include c-arc.texi
7951 @end ifset
7952
7953 @ifset ARM
7954 @include c-arm.texi
7955 @end ifset
7956
7957 @ifset AVR
7958 @include c-avr.texi
7959 @end ifset
7960
7961 @ifset Blackfin
7962 @include c-bfin.texi
7963 @end ifset
7964
7965 @ifset BPF
7966 @include c-bpf.texi
7967 @end ifset
7968
7969 @ifset CR16
7970 @include c-cr16.texi
7971 @end ifset
7972
7973 @ifset CRIS
7974 @include c-cris.texi
7975 @end ifset
7976
7977 @ifset CSKY
7978 @include c-csky.texi
7979 @end ifset
7980
7981 @ifset Renesas-all
7982 @ifclear GENERIC
7983 @node Machine Dependencies
7984 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7985
7986 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7987 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7988 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7989 family.
7990
7991 @menu
7992 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7993 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7994 @end menu
7995 @lowersections
7996 @end ifclear
7997 @end ifset
7998
7999 @ifset D10V
8000 @include c-d10v.texi
8001 @end ifset
8002
8003 @ifset D30V
8004 @include c-d30v.texi
8005 @end ifset
8006
8007 @ifset EPIPHANY
8008 @include c-epiphany.texi
8009 @end ifset
8010
8011 @ifset H8/300
8012 @include c-h8300.texi
8013 @end ifset
8014
8015 @ifset HPPA
8016 @include c-hppa.texi
8017 @end ifset
8018
8019 @ifset I80386
8020 @include c-i386.texi
8021 @end ifset
8022
8023 @ifset IA64
8024 @include c-ia64.texi
8025 @end ifset
8026
8027 @ifset IP2K
8028 @include c-ip2k.texi
8029 @end ifset
8030
8031 @ifset LM32
8032 @include c-lm32.texi
8033 @end ifset
8034
8035 @ifset M32C
8036 @include c-m32c.texi
8037 @end ifset
8038
8039 @ifset M32R
8040 @include c-m32r.texi
8041 @end ifset
8042
8043 @ifset M680X0
8044 @include c-m68k.texi
8045 @end ifset
8046
8047 @ifset M68HC11
8048 @include c-m68hc11.texi
8049 @end ifset
8050
8051 @ifset S12Z
8052 @include c-s12z.texi
8053 @end ifset
8054
8055 @ifset METAG
8056 @include c-metag.texi
8057 @end ifset
8058
8059 @ifset MICROBLAZE
8060 @include c-microblaze.texi
8061 @end ifset
8062
8063 @ifset MIPS
8064 @include c-mips.texi
8065 @end ifset
8066
8067 @ifset MMIX
8068 @include c-mmix.texi
8069 @end ifset
8070
8071 @ifset MSP430
8072 @include c-msp430.texi
8073 @end ifset
8074
8075 @ifset NDS32
8076 @include c-nds32.texi
8077 @end ifset
8078
8079 @ifset NIOSII
8080 @include c-nios2.texi
8081 @end ifset
8082
8083 @ifset NS32K
8084 @include c-ns32k.texi
8085 @end ifset
8086
8087 @ifset OPENRISC
8088 @include c-or1k.texi
8089 @end ifset
8090
8091 @ifset PDP11
8092 @include c-pdp11.texi
8093 @end ifset
8094
8095 @ifset PJ
8096 @include c-pj.texi
8097 @end ifset
8098
8099 @ifset PPC
8100 @include c-ppc.texi
8101 @end ifset
8102
8103 @ifset PRU
8104 @include c-pru.texi
8105 @end ifset
8106
8107 @ifset RISCV
8108 @include c-riscv.texi
8109 @end ifset
8110
8111 @ifset RL78
8112 @include c-rl78.texi
8113 @end ifset
8114
8115 @ifset RX
8116 @include c-rx.texi
8117 @end ifset
8118
8119 @ifset S390
8120 @include c-s390.texi
8121 @end ifset
8122
8123 @ifset SCORE
8124 @include c-score.texi
8125 @end ifset
8126
8127 @ifset SH
8128 @include c-sh.texi
8129 @end ifset
8130
8131 @ifset SPARC
8132 @include c-sparc.texi
8133 @end ifset
8134
8135 @ifset TIC54X
8136 @include c-tic54x.texi
8137 @end ifset
8138
8139 @ifset TIC6X
8140 @include c-tic6x.texi
8141 @end ifset
8142
8143 @ifset TILEGX
8144 @include c-tilegx.texi
8145 @end ifset
8146
8147 @ifset TILEPRO
8148 @include c-tilepro.texi
8149 @end ifset
8150
8151 @ifset V850
8152 @include c-v850.texi
8153 @end ifset
8154
8155 @ifset VAX
8156 @include c-vax.texi
8157 @end ifset
8158
8159 @ifset VISIUM
8160 @include c-visium.texi
8161 @end ifset
8162
8163 @ifset WASM32
8164 @include c-wasm32.texi
8165 @end ifset
8166
8167 @ifset XGATE
8168 @include c-xgate.texi
8169 @end ifset
8170
8171 @ifset XSTORMY16
8172 @include c-xstormy16.texi
8173 @end ifset
8174
8175 @ifset XTENSA
8176 @include c-xtensa.texi
8177 @end ifset
8178
8179 @ifset Z80
8180 @include c-z80.texi
8181 @end ifset
8182
8183 @ifset Z8000
8184 @include c-z8k.texi
8185 @end ifset
8186
8187 @ifset GENERIC
8188 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
8189 @raisesections
8190 @end ifset
8191
8192 @node Reporting Bugs
8193 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8194 @cindex bugs in assembler
8195 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
8196
8197 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
8198
8199 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
8200 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
8201 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
8202 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
8203
8204 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8205 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8206
8207 @menu
8208 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8209 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8210 @end menu
8211
8212 @node Bug Criteria
8213 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8214 @cindex bug criteria
8215
8216 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8217
8218 @itemize @bullet
8219 @cindex fatal signal
8220 @cindex assembler crash
8221 @cindex crash of assembler
8222 @item
8223 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8224 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
8225
8226 @cindex error on valid input
8227 @item
8228 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8229
8230 @cindex invalid input
8231 @item
8232 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8233 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
8234 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
8235
8236 @item
8237 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
8238 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
8239 @end itemize
8240
8241 @node Bug Reporting
8242 @section How to Report Bugs
8243 @cindex bug reports
8244 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
8245
8246 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
8247 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
8248 contact that organization first.
8249
8250 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8251 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8252 distribution.
8253
8254 @ifset BUGURL
8255 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
8256 to @value{BUGURL}.
8257 @end ifset
8258
8259 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8260 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8261 fact or leave it out, state it!
8262
8263 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
8264 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
8265 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
8266 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
8267 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
8268 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
8269 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
8270 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8271 and the most helpful.
8272
8273 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
8274 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
8275 that the bug has not been reported previously.
8276
8277 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8278 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8279 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8280 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8281
8282 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8283
8284 @itemize @bullet
8285 @item
8286 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8287 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8288
8289 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8290 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8291
8292 @item
8293 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8294
8295 @item
8296 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8297 version number.
8298
8299 @item
8300 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8301 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8302
8303 @item
8304 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8305 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8306 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8307
8308 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8309 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8310
8311 @item
8312 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8313 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8314 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8315 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8316 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8317 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8318 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8319
8320 @item
8321 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8322 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8323
8324 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8325 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8326 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8327 make a mistake.
8328
8329 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8330 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8331 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8332 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8333 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8334 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8335 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8336 observations.
8337
8338 @item
8339 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8340 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8341 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8342 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8343 by line number.
8344
8345 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8346 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8347 @end itemize
8348
8349 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8350
8351 @itemize @bullet
8352 @item
8353 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8354
8355 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8356 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8357 changes will not affect it.
8358
8359 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8360 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8361 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8362 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8363
8364 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8365 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8366 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8367 less time, and so on.
8368
8369 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8370 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8371
8372 @item
8373 A patch for the bug.
8374
8375 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8376 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8377 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8378 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8379
8380 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8381 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8382 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8383 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8384
8385 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8386 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8387 help us to understand.
8388
8389 @item
8390 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8391
8392 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8393 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8394 @end itemize
8395
8396 @node Acknowledgements
8397 @chapter Acknowledgements
8398
8399 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8400 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8401 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8402 @c (October 2012),
8403 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8404
8405 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8406 more details?}
8407
8408 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8409 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8410 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8411
8412 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8413 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8414 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8415 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8416 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8417 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8418 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8419 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8420 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8421 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8422
8423 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8424 in format-specific I/O modules.
8425
8426 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8427 has done much work with it since.
8428
8429 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8430
8431 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8432
8433 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8434 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8435
8436 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8437 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8438 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8439 support a.out format.
8440
8441 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8442 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8443 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8444 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8445 targets.
8446
8447 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8448 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8449 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8450 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8451 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8452 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8453 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8454
8455 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8456 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8457 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8458 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8459
8460 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8461
8462 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8463
8464 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8465 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8466 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8467 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8468
8469 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8470 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8471 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8472 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8473 and some initial 64-bit support).
8474
8475 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8476
8477 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8478 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8479
8480 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8481 flavors.
8482
8483 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8484 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8485
8486 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8487 configuration enhancements.
8488
8489 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8490
8491 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8492 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8493 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8494 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8495
8496 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8497 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8498 @include fdl.texi
8499
8500 @node AS Index
8501 @unnumbered AS Index
8502
8503 @printindex cp
8504
8505 @bye
8506 @c Local Variables:
8507 @c fill-column: 79
8508 @c End:
This page took 0.230429 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.